Technical information

Manuals Brands Motorola Manuals Computer equipment AT Commands G24-L

Technical Information

Motorola G24 Developer’s Guide

AT Commands Reference Manual

AUGUST 5, 2008

6889192V28-K

Summary of content (680 pages)

PAGE 1

Technical Information Motorola G24 Developer’s Guide AT Commands Reference Manual AUGUST 5, 2008 6889192V28-K
PAGE 2

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE Notice While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola, Inc.
PAGE 3

Trademarks MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. ©Copyright 2008 Motorola, Inc.
PAGE 4
PAGE 5

Table of Contents Manual Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi Target Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi Applicable Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 6

Table of Contents TCP/UDP IP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 UDP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 7

Table of Contents S-parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Syntax Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Argument Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numeric Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 8

Table of Contents Call Control AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, Dial Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D>, Direct Dialing from Phone Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DL, Dial Last Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 9

Table of Contents Directory Access Commands - Date Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86 +MALARM, Date Book Reminder Unsolicited Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86 +MALMH, Terminate the Current Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87 +MDBGD, Defines General Setting for Date Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88 +MDBR, Read Date Book Entries .
PAGE 10

Table of Contents Network Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +CSQ, Signal Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +CRLP, Radio Link Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +CREG, Network Registration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 11

Table of Contents Advanced Audio Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +MAPATH, Audio Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +MAVOL, Volume Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +MAMUT, Input Devices Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 12

Table of Contents Error Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +CMEE, Report Mobile Equipment Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +CEER, Extended Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +MGEER, GPRS Extended Error Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UI (User Interface) .
PAGE 13

Table of Contents TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-394 +MIPCALL, Create a Wireless Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-394 +MIPOPEN, Open a Socket (UDP or TCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-396 +MIPODM, Open a Socket (UDP or TCP) in Online Data Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 14

Table of Contents RS232 Multiplexer Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MUX Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protocol Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 15

Table of Contents Establishing GPRS PDP Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating a Saved Profile in G24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two Ways to Activate PDP Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 16

Table of Contents MUX-Init State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 MUX State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Software Procedures Related to RS232 HW Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 RI Hardware Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 17

List of Figures 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 G24 Operation Modes Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Files Transfer Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Sidetone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 18

List of Figures xiv 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 Sleep Mode when S24 > 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22 Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23 Get Inkey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 19

List of Tables 1-1 AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 2-1 Core AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 20

List of Tables 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-49 3-50 3-51 3-52 3-53 3-54 3-55 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-59 3-60 3-61 3-62 3-63 3-64 3-65 3-66 3-67 3-68 3-69 3-70 3-71 3-72 3-73 3-74 3-75 3-76 3-77 3-78 3-79 3-80 3-81 3-82 3-83 3-84 3-85 3-86 3-87 3-88 3-89 3-90 3-91 3-92 3-93 3-94 3-95 3-96 xvi +MCSN Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-83 +MPDPM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 21

List of Tables 3-97 3-98 3-99 3-100 3-101 3-102 3-103 3-104 3-105 3-106 3-107 3-108 3-109 3-110 3-111 3-112 3-113 3-114 3-115 3-116 3-117 3-118 3-119 3-120 3-121 3-122 3-123 3-124 3-125 3-126 3-127 3-128 3-129 3-130 3-131 3-132 3-133 3-134 3-135 3-136 3-137 3-138 3-139 3-140 3-141 3-142 3-143 3-144 3-145 3-146 3-147 3-148 3-149 3-150 August 5, 2008 +MEMD Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165 +MEMW Parameters . . . . .
PAGE 22

List of Tables 3-151 3-152 3-153 3-154 3-155 3-156 3-157 3-158 3-159 3-160 3-161 3-162 3-163 3-164 3-165 3-166 3-167 3-168 3-169 3-170 3-171 3-172 3-173 3-174 3-175 3-176 3-177 3-178 3-179 3-180 3-181 3-182 3-183 3-184 3-185 3-186 3-187 3-188 3-189 3-190 3-191 3-192 3-193 3-194 3-195 3-196 3-197 3-198 3-199 3-200 3-201 3-202 3-203 3-204 xviii Basic and Advanced Audio Modes Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-236 +CRSL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 23

List of Tables 3-205 3-206 3-207 3-208 3-209 3-210 3-211 3-212 3-213 3-214 3-215 3-216 3-217 3-218 3-219 3-220 3-221 3-222 3-223 3-224 3-225 3-226 3-227 3-228 3-229 3-230 3-231 3-232 3-233 3-234 3-235 3-236 3-237 3-238 3-239 3-240 3-241 3-242 3-243 3-244 3-245 3-246 3-247 3-248 3-249 3-374 3-250 3-251 3-252 3-253 3-254 3-255 3-256 3-257 August 5, 2008 &Y Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-318 +CKPD Parameters.
PAGE 24

List of Tables xx 3-258 3-259 3-260 3-261 3-262 3-263 3-264 3-265 3-266 3-267 3-268 3-269 3-270 3-271 3-272 3-273 3-274 3-275 3-276 3-277 3-278 3-279 3-280 3-281 3-282 3-283 3-284 3-285 3-286 3-287 3-288 3-289 3-290 3-291 3-292 3-293 3-294 3-295 3-296 3-297 3-298 3-299 3-300 3-301 3-302 3-303 3-304 3-305 Set Event List Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-386 Sample Language Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 25

Preface Manual Scope This manual introduces the G24 AT commands, and describes how software developers can use these commands to communicate with the G24 device, and to create software applications that communicate with the G24 using these commands. Note: The integrator should read the corresponding SW release notes for the G24 version he is using to get information about differences from this manual.
PAGE 26

Applicable Documents Applicable Documents • G24 Module Hardware Description – 6889192V27 • G24 Developer’s Kit – 6889192V26 Contact Us We at Motorola want to make this guide as helpful as possible. Keep us informed of your comments and suggestions for improvements. For general contact, technical support, report documentation errors and to order manuals, use this email address: M2M.CustomerCare@motorola.com Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our information.
PAGE 27

Preface Manual Banner Definitions A banner text in the page footer under the book title (for example, Preliminary or FOA) indicates that some information contained in the manual is not yet approved for general customer use. Field Service For Field Service requests, use this email address: n2csfs01@motorola.com General Safety Remember!. . .
PAGE 28

Caring for the Environment Keep away from live circuits Operating personnel must: • not remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component replacement, or any internal adjustment • not replace components with power cable connected.
PAGE 29

Preface Please contact the Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC) for assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are listed at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com Select Customer Network Resolution Center contact information. Alternatively if you do not have access to CNRC or the internet, contact the Local Motorola Office. Disposal of Motorola equipment in non-EU countries In non-EU countries, dispose of Motorola Networks equipment in accordance with national and regional regulations.
PAGE 30

How to Get Warranty Service? Warranty Term, and must immediately submit the Product for service to Motorola's Authorized Repair or Service Center. Motorola shall not be bound by Product related statements not directly made by Motorola nor any warranty obligations applicable to the seller. A list of the Motorola Call Center numbers is enclosed with this Product.
PAGE 31

Preface In some cases, you may be requested to provide additional information concerning the maintenance of the Products by Motorola Authorized Service Centers only, therefore it is important to keep a record of any previous repairs, and make them available if questions arise concerning maintenance. Conditions This warranty will not apply if the type or serial numbers on the Product has been altered, deleted, duplicated, removed, or made illegible.
PAGE 32

Installed Data 6. Defects or damage due to range, coverage, availability, grade of service, or operation of the cellular system by the cellular operator. 7. Defects or damage due to moist, liquid or spills of food. 8. Control unit coil cords in the Product that are stretched or have the modular tab broken. 9. All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to customer normal use.
PAGE 33

Preface Revision History Manual Number 6889192V28-K Manual Title G24 Developer’s Guide: AT Commands Reference Manual Version Information The following table lists the manual version, date of version, and remarks about the version. Revision History Version August 5, 2008 Date Issue Remarks A January 1, 2006 Initial Release B April 1, 2006 Updated with SW version G24_G_0C.11.52R.
PAGE 34

Revision History Revision History (Cont.) Version xxx Date Issue Remarks G December 31, 2007 Updated with SW version G24_G_0C.11.XXR. Commands added: +MDLC,+MHDPB, +MHUP, +MIAU Commands updated: &C, &D, +CNUM, +CSCS, +CUSD, H, +MEMGS, +MEML, +MEMR, +MEMW, +MIPCALL, +MIPODM, +MIPSETS, +MMAD, +MVC New features and command groups: Firmware Update Over the Air (FOTA), Phone and Date Books Directory Access Commands, SIM Application Toolkit (STK) H June 30, 2008 Updated with SW version G24_G_0C.11.B6R.
PAGE 35

Chapter 1: Product Features Connectivity Interface The user can establish two types of connections in order to establish an AT command session with the G24: • RS232 connection • USB connection The user can use either RS232 or USB connections, but not both simultaneously. GPRS Operation Overview The GPRS allows the service subscriber to send and receive data in an end-to-end packet-transfer mode, without utilizing network resources in circuit-switched mode.
PAGE 36

CSD Operation 2. Upon being interrupted by the RI signal, drop the DTR line to switch to command mode (depending on the previous DTR configuration: AT&D). 3. Answer the call (suspending the GPRS session). 4. At the end of the call, pull the DTR to resume the GPRS session.
PAGE 37

Chapter 1: Product Features Service Provider (ISP) to send email or dialing the corporate Intranet to set up a virtual private network (VPN) connection to retrieve confidential customer information from a company database.
PAGE 38

Improved OEM Features Set up Idle Mode Text The proactive SIM mechanism enables the SIM to initiate actions to be handled by the G24. Using this service, the SIM can inform the G24 that it has information pending for action.
PAGE 39

Chapter 1: Product Features TCP/UDP IP Connection Overview The network capabilities are achieved by using different layers of connections. Every layer of connections provides basic connections to the layer above it. The higher the layer is, the more capabilities it can provide. Internet Site www...
PAGE 40

Improved OEM Features 2. The G24 opens a TCP/IP stack as one of its "sockets" (it must know the target’s IP address and port number). 3. Once the connection is established, data is transferred freely in both directions (upload and download). Connection with another G24 using the "GPRS Manager" The following occurs when creating a TCP/IP connection with another G24 using the "GPRS Manager": 1. The OEM on the target side (server) uses the "GPRS Manager" application.
PAGE 41

Chapter 1: Product Features UDP/IP The set of AT commands created for the TCP/IP connection is used for the UDP/IP connection as well. Therefore, UDP/IP must open a UDP stack using the MIPOPEN AT command. The connection created does not change any concept regarding the UDP/IP known protocol (which is connectionless), this is just an easy way for the terminal to specify to the G24 which of the four possible stacks should be used.
PAGE 42

Improved OEM Features 5. Server side: – After receiving the first packet from the client, the server knows the IP address and port number of the G24. – The IP address and port number for the specific mobile G24 should be saved in the DB. Note: Every +MIPPUSH sets the destination IP address and destination port number for the current and future transactions. These values are used for the next push if not explicitly overwritten.
PAGE 43

Chapter 1: Product Features There are two options for valid closing of a socket, opened in Online Data Mode, when G24 is in PREMUX state: • Switch G24 to pseudo-command mode and enter +MIPCLOSE command with opened in Online Data Mode Socket ID. • Disable DTR line on RS232 communication port in case of A&D2 or AT&D3 parameter configuration. When G24 is in MUX state, change of DTR or software DTR state on ODM MUX channel closes ODM session in case of A&D1, A&D2 or AT&D3.
PAGE 44

Improved OEM Features • Up to four simultaneous protocol connections. • Ability to pass data via the protocol stack using AT commands (command mode). This relieves the terminal from switching the RS232 to "binary mode" and back to "command mode". • Ability to use UDP and TCP simultaneously. • No need for protocol support from the terminal - only data sending and receiving. • Reduced memory utilization. The G24 manages the protocol stack and therefore saves terminal memory.
PAGE 45

Chapter 1: Product Features Manage FTP Connection AT+FTPOPEN command is used to open a FTP connection with a remote FTP server. When G24 performs FTP connection establish procedure, it allocates two TCP sockets. One of them is used for FTP control channel, the other - for FTP data channel (listen mode).
PAGE 46

Improved OEM Features The G24 operation modes switching is shown in Figure 1-2. Figure 1-2: G24 Operation Modes Switching Note: 1 AT&D settings = 2 or 3. The operation closes the actual FTP connection and switches G24 to command mode. AT&D settings = 1 does not affect. Established FTP connection can be closed when G24 is in command mode by AT+FTPCLOSE command or by changing DTR line status from ON to OFF when data transfer operations are performed (G24 is in online data mode).
PAGE 47

Chapter 1: Product Features • When a data byte has the same code as EOF character, a two byte sequence of ESC and EOF characters is sent instead. • When a data byte has the same code as ESC character, a two byte sequence of ESC and ESC characters is sent instead. • When end of file is reached, EOF character is sent.
PAGE 48

Improved OEM Features "read" state still indicate actually used / unused sockets include sockets, allocated for active FTP connection: • AT+MIPOPEN? indicates inactive sockets (include allocated for active FTP connection) • AT+MIPCLOSE? indicates active sockets (include allocated for active FTP connection) When G24 receives +MIPCLOSE command for closing a socket, used within FTP connection, the error code: 302 (FTP session is active) is returned to the user.
PAGE 49

Chapter 1: Product Features Echo Suppression Echo suppression suppresses a large amount of the output sound picked up by the input device (cancels all echoes). G24 Remote Spkr 5 1 Mic 2 Spkr 3 Mic 4 Out Out line is filtered by In line In Echo Suppression 1 Solution 2 3 4 5 4 ( 3 1 ( Problem Loop Figure 1-5: Echo Suppression Noise Suppress Noise suppression improves audio quality in all modes by suppressing environment noise from being picked up by the input device.
PAGE 50

MUX Integration MUX Integration Overview The G24 is supplied with an internal GSM 7.10 protocol stack, also referred to as a multiplexer or MUX. The G24 with multiplexer support utility provides the following capabilities: • Provides the terminal with up to five virtual channels on one physical RS-232 connection. • Provides simultaneous data (CSD/GPRS) and command (AT command set) services. In this way, many applications can use a single RS232 line via virtual channels.
PAGE 51

Chapter 1: Product Features • • • • • • • Receive Incoming SMS indication Inquiry GSM coverage indication Setup a voice call (while G24 is in GPRS session) Send & Receive SMS Read/write to/from Phone Book Local modem operation Network interrogation and settings Technical Description The MUX feature adds five virtual channels on a single physical RS232 line: • Channel #0 - DLC0 for MUX Control • Channels #1 through #4 are used for Data/Fax, GPRS, Voice call and control, and Logger/External modem applicat
PAGE 52

Short Message Service (SMS) Short Message Service (SMS) Overview The SMS feature provides means for SMS messages handling and the reporting of SMS reception events. G24 SMS implementation is based on the GSM 07.05 specification. Features The SMS, as defined within the GSM 900/1800/1900 digital mobile phone standard: • A single short message can be up to 160 characters of ASCII text in length (7-bit coded). Message text can comprise words, numbers or an alphanumeric combination.
PAGE 53

Chapter 1: Product Features Technical Description The G24 memory for incoming short messages is SIM-dependent. A new incoming message is saved in the first free memory location, from index 1, according to the SIM card. The G24 memory can contain up to 73 outgoing and CB messages. A new outgoing message is saved in the next free memory location, from index 101 up to index 352. SMS Type Incoming messages SMS Index 1 Max Number of SMS SIM-dependent 2 ... 30 Future use 31 N/A ...
PAGE 54

Email Message Services Email Message Services Overview The Email feature is intended for Email messages handling: send, receive, read, list and delete. It is also intended for email account setup. See Figure 1-7 for general concept. POP3 Email server Figure 1-7: Email Server Connection Overview Features • Sending and receiving emails can be done only when account setup is fully completed using +MEMISP and +MEMAS. • Sending and receiving emails can be done only when GPRS connection service is available.
PAGE 55

Chapter 1: Product Features Fax Overview A Service Class 1 facsimile G24 provides a basic level of services necessary to support Group 3 facsimile operation. This requires support from the facsimile terminal to implement the recommended T.30 procedures for document facsimile transmission and recommended T.4 for representing facsimile images. Features and Benefits Sending and receiving Fax services.
PAGE 56

Character Sets Character Sets The following includes the references to various tables that provide conversions between the different character sets. • CS1 - GSM to UCS2. • CS2 - ASCII to/from UTF8. • CS3 - UCS2 to/from UTF8. For the full content of a specific conversion table, refer to Appendix A, Character Set Tables. ASCII Character Set Management The ASCII character set is a standard seven-bit code that was proposed by ANSI in 1963, and finalized in 1968.
PAGE 57

Chapter 1: Product Features Unlike some legacy encoding, UTF-8 is easy to parse. So-called lead and trail bytes are easily distinguished. Moving forwards or backwards in a text string is easier in UTF-8 than in many other multi-byte encoding. The codes in the first half of the first row in Character Set Table CS2 (UTF-8 <-> ASCII) are replaced in this transformation format by their ASCII codes, which are octets in the range between 00h and 7F.
PAGE 58

AT Commands Summary AT Commands Summary The following list contains a summary of all the G24 AT commands sorted by functionality. Table 1-1: AT Commands AT Command Description Page Modem ID Subscriber Unit Identity +CGMI This command displays manufacturer identification. Page 3-1 +GMI This command displays manufacturer identification. Page 3-1 +FMI This command displays manufacturer identification. Page 3-1 +CGMM This command displays the model identification.
PAGE 59

Chapter 1: Product Features Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page H This command hangs up, or terminates a particular call. Page 3-17 A This command answers an incoming call, placing the G24 into the appropriate mode, as indicated by the RING message. Page 3-19 +CRC This command controls whether to present the extended format of the incoming call indication.
PAGE 60

AT Commands Summary Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command Description Page +MVC This AT command is used to choose and configure the priority order of the supported voice codecs (vocoders). Page 3-43 +MTTY This command is used to enable/disable the TTY (Tele Typewriter) support in the G24. Page 3-44 Call Status Messages +CPAS This command displays the current activity status of the G24, for example, call in progress, or ringing.
PAGE 61

Chapter 1: Product Features Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command Description Page +CPBF This command searches the currently active phone book for a particular entry, by name. Page 3-75 +CPBW This command stores a new entry in the phone book, or deletes an existing entry from the phone book. Page 3-76 +CSVM This command handles the selection of the number to the voice mail server.
PAGE 62

AT Commands Summary Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command Description Page +CMGL This command displays a list of SMS messages stored in the G24 memory. Page 3-114 +MMGL This command displays a list of SMS messages stored in the G24 memory. Page 3-114 +CMGR This command reads selected SMS messages from the G24 memory. Page 3-118 +MMGR This command reads selected SMS messages from the G24 memory.
PAGE 63

Chapter 1: Product Features Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command +MEGA Description This command updates the Email Gateway Address. Page Page 3-167 Network Network Commands +CSQ This command displays the signal strength received by the G24. Page 3-169 +CRLP This command displays the Radio Link Protocol parameters. Page 3-170 +CREG This command enables/disables the network status registration unsolicited result code.
PAGE 64

AT Commands Summary Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command Description Page &C This command determines how the state of the DCD line relates to the detection of the received line signal from the distant end. Page 3-205 &D This command determines how the G24 responds when the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) status is changed from ON to OFF during the online data state. Page 3-207 +MCWAKE This command displays reports on the status of the GPRS/GSM coverage.
PAGE 65

Chapter 1: Product Features Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command Description Page +VTS This command transmits a string of DTMF tones when a voice call is active. Page 3-257 +CALM This command handles the selection of the G24’s alert sound mode. Page 3-251 +MDMIC This command enables/disables the setting of microphone gain values by +MMICG in digital audio mode. Page 3-252 +MMICG This command handles the selection of microphone gain values.
PAGE 66

AT Commands Summary Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command Description Page +CPWD This command sets a new password for the facility lock. Page 3-264 +CLCK This command locks, unlocks or interrogates a G24 or a network facility . Page 3-265 +EMPC This command unlocks or resets the first PLMN of the inserted SIM. Page 3-268 +MFOTAWSCF G This command sets the Web-Session default entry. Page 3-271 +MFOTACNFG This command enables setting the DM session as Automatic/Non-Automatic (i.e.
PAGE 67

Chapter 1: Product Features Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command Description Page &F This command restores the factory default configuration profile. Page 3-289 Z This command resets the default configuration. Page 3-290 Sleep Mode Commands S24 This S-parameter activates/disables the Sleep mode. If the parameter value is greater than 0, it represent the number of seconds till the G24 enters sleep mode.
PAGE 68

AT Commands Summary Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command +MHDPB Description This command is used to enable and disable the SEND/END functionality of the headset dual-position button. Page Page 3-326 Unsolicited UI Status Messages +CKEV This command causes the G24 to send an unsolicited message when a key is pressed on the G24 keypad, and local key press echo is enabled. Page 3-328 +MUPB This command causes the G24 to send an event when a phone book entry is accessed or modified by the user.
PAGE 69

Chapter 1: Product Features Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command Description Page +CGEQMIN This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile, which is checked by the MT against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate/Modify PDP Context Accept message. Page 3-354 +CGEQNEG This command allows the TE to retrieve the negotiated QoS profiles returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message.
PAGE 70

AT Commands Summary Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command Description Page +MIPDATA This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal indicating a data comes from Network when G24 is in pseudo-command mode. Page 3-410 +MIPXOFF This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal to stop sending data. Page 3-410 +MIPXON This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal when the G24 has free memory in the accumulating buffer.
PAGE 71

Chapter 1: Product Features Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command Description Page +FTPREN This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to rename a file. Page 3-441 +FTPRETR This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to send a file to the G24. Page 3-449 +FTPRMD This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to remove a directory. Page 3-438 +FTPSTAT This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to send status.
PAGE 72

AT Commands Summary Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command Description Page F This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 L This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 M This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 N This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect.
PAGE 73

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands AT Commands Overview AT commands are sets of commands used for communication with the G24 cellular modem. AT commands are comprised of assemblies of ASCII characters which start with the "AT" prefix (except the commands A/ and +++). The AT prefix is derived from the word Attention, which asks the modem to pay attention to the current request (command).
PAGE 74

AT Commands Protocol General System Abbreviations The basic system configuration contains a modem and a terminal. The G24 is the modem and may be referred to as the DCE, the phone, the mobile or the radio. The terminal may be referred to as the DTE or the TE. AT Commands Protocol The figure below shows a general messaging sequence of AT commands protocol between the terminal and the G24. Terminal G24 C ommand R esponse N R esults C ode Indications M N , ..., 0,1 = K M , ...
PAGE 75

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands AT Commands Structure Command Structure An AT command line may contain one or more commands. Delimiters are used to separate the commands from each other, according to the following structure: Prefix Command1 Delimiter Command2 Delimiter … CommandN Suffix Each AT command has the "AT" prefix string. Each AT command has the suffix . The delimiter is either a semicolon ";" or none, meaning space (basic commands).
PAGE 76

AT Commands Structure Results Code Structure When a command is issued, the G24 responds with a message, called a "Result Code", which tells the terminal the result of the command that was requested. Result codes can indicate, for example, the execution status of the command or the remote modem connection status. Result codes can be represented either as numerical codes or as verbose responses. By default, the G24 responds with verbose response codes. The result code has the following structure:.
PAGE 77

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands AT Commands Protocol & Structure Configuration The AT commands message flow and structure may be configured by the terminal. The G24 can be configured not to follow a command with an echo and/or results code. It can be configured to transmit the results code in either of two ways: Verbose or Numeric. This (and other) configurations can be set using the following commands: Command Description S3=[] Command line termination character (default setting 0x13).
PAGE 78

Command Token Types Command Token Types Basic Syntax Command Format The format of Basic Syntax commands (except for the D and S commands) is: [] where: is either a single character, or the "&" character (IA5 2/6) followed by a single character. Characters used in are taken from the set of alphabetic characters. may be a string of one or more characters from "0" through "9" representing a decimal integer value.
PAGE 79

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands Command Argument Types consists of either a numeric constant or a string constant. consist of several parameters separated by commas. Example of compound_value: ,,…, Numeric Constants Numeric constants are expressed in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary form. In the G24, the definition of each command specifies which form is used for values associated with that command.
PAGE 80

Values Values Range of Values When the action accepts a single numeric sub-parameter, or the parameter accepts only one numeric value, the set of supported values may be presented in the information text as an ordered list of values. The following are some examples of value range indications: Value Range Description (0) Only the value 0 is supported. (1,2,3) The values 1, 2, and 3 are supported. (1-3) The values 1 through 3 are supported. (0,4,5,6,9,11,12) The several listed values are supported.
PAGE 81

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands Core AT Commands The G24 responds to a limited commands set when the SIM card is not functioning, or not present. These commands are referred to as the "Core AT commands". In previous products, the Core AT commands were called "Basic AT commands". The name "Core" differentiates between the basic AT commands format and the limited service AT commands. The following table lists the Core AT commands.
PAGE 82

Core AT Commands Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command 2-10 Description Page &Y This command displays the default user profile. Page 3-318 ? This command displays the most recently updated value stored in the S-register. Page 3-289 \A This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 \B This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 \G This command sets the use of the software flow control.
PAGE 83

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +CLCC This command displays a list of all current G24 calls and their statuses, and also enables/disables the unsolicited indication of the call list. Page 3-47 +CLVL This command sets the volume of the internal loudspeaker of the G24.
PAGE 84

Core AT Commands Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command 2-12 Description Page +FTPCWD This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to change the working directory. Page 3-435 +FTPDEL This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to delete a file. Page 3-440 +FTPINFO This command causes the G24 to enable or disable FTP unsolicited indication to the user. Page 3-434 +FTPLIST This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to send a list.
PAGE 85

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +MADIGITAL This command switches between analog and digital audio modes. Page 3-250 +MAFEAT This command controls the various algorithm features, such as sidetone, echo cancel and noise suppress. Page 3-249 +MAMUT This command controls the muting/unmuting of all input paths (MIC, HDST_MIC, DIGITAL_RX).
PAGE 86

Core AT Commands Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command 2-14 Description Page +MFOTAABOR T Aborts the DM session. Page 3-277 +MFOTABS Init OTA bootstrap definition. Page 3-279 +MFOTACNFG This command enables setting the DM session as Automatic/Non-Automatic (i.e. Transparent/Non-Transparent). Page 3-273 +MFOTAIND This command sends Unsolicited FOTA indications toward DTE. Page 3-277 +MFOTAINSTL Installs the updated package.
PAGE 87

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +MRST This command enables customer software to perform a hard reset to the G24 unit. Page 3-213 +MTCTS This command sets the CTS pin of the RS232 to not active (high), waits one second and then sets the CTS to active (low). Page 3-204 +MTDTR This command checks and displays the physical current status of the DTR pin of the RS232.
PAGE 88

Core AT Commands Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.) AT Command 2-16 Description Page P This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 Q This command determines whether to output/suppress the result codes. Page 3-282 READY This unsolicited notification indicates UART is ready. Page 3-217 Sn This command reads/writes values of the S-registers, and includes registers 1-49, 94, 96 (Audio) and 102 (Sleep mode).
PAGE 89

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Modem ID Subscriber Unit Identity These commands allow the user to query the type of device that is attached, the technology used in the device, as well as basic operating information about the device. +CGMI, +GMI, +FMI, Request Manufacturer ID These commands display manufacturer identification. The G24 outputs a string containing manufacturer identification information, indicating that this is a Motorola device.
PAGE 90

Modem ID +CGMM, +GMM, +FMM, Request Model ID These commands request the model identification. The G24 outputs a string containing information about the specific model, including a list of the supported technology used, and the particular model number.
PAGE 91

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CGMR, +GMR, +FMR, Request Revision These commands request the revision identification. The G24 outputs a string containing the revision identification information of the software version contained within the device. Command Response/Action AT+CGMR AT+CGMR? +CGMR: AT+GMR AT+GMR? +GMR: AT+FMR AT+FMR? +FMR: Example AT+CGMR +CGMR: "G24_G_0C.11.61R" AT+GMR +GMR: "G24_G_0C.11.61R" AT+FMR +FMR: "G24_G_0C.11.
PAGE 92

Modem ID The following table shows the +CGSN, +GSN parameters. Table 3-1: +CGSN, +GSN Parameters Description The IMEI (International Mobile Station Equipment Identity) number is comprised of 15 digits, as specified by GSM 03.03 [3]. IMEI numbers are composed of the following elements, all in decimal digits: Type Approval Code (TAC) - 6 digits Serial Number (SNR) - 6 digits Spare digit - 1 digit The TAC and SNR are protected against unauthorized changes.
PAGE 93

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +CSCS parameter optional values. Table 3-2: +CSCS Parameters Character Set Input/Output Format “ASCII” ASCII (0x00 - 0x7F) Quoted string. (For example, "AB" equals two 8-bit characters with decimal values 65, 66.) “GSM” GSM default alphabet (GSM 03.38 subclause 6.2.1) HEX representation. "UCS2" Unicode (ISO/IEC 10646 [32]) HEX representation. (For example, 00410042 equals two 16-bit characters with decimal values 65, 66.
PAGE 94

Modem ID +CIMI, Request IMSI This command displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity number. Command AT+CIMI AT+CIMI? Response/Action +CIMI: or: +CME ERROR: Example AT+CIMI +CIMI: 314566320021400 +CFSN, Read Factory Serial Number This command is used to query the factory serial number. Command AT+CFSN? Response/Action +CFSN: Example AT+CFSN? +CFSN: "074SFX5854" OK I, Request Identification Information This command displays various G24 information items.
PAGE 95

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the information items that are supported by the G24. ATIn Description Output 3 Reports Product Title Motorola Mobile Phone 5 Reports Software Architecture P2K 7 Reports Product Description 8 Reports Software Version 9 Reports Flex Version Example ATI7 G24 OEM Module OK ATI8 G24_G_0C.11.
PAGE 96

Modem ID Read Command Command Response/Action +CNUM (MSISDN supported) +CNUM: [],, [+CNUM: [],,] [...] +CNUM (MSISDN not supported) +CNUM: The following table shows the +CNUM parameters.
PAGE 97

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CLAC, List of All Available AT Commands Command Execute Syntax +CLAC Response/Action List of available AT commands Remarks The Execute command displays a list of all the AT commands supported by the G24.
PAGE 98

Modem ID L M N O P Q S T V X Y Z \A \S OK Capability Reporting This set of commands enables a user to determine G24’s protocol level. It also enables other support provided by the G24, such as information about the currently implemented protocol version (used to detect older G24s that may not support all commands), as well as determining which optional commands are implemented in a particular G24 software load.
PAGE 99

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Call Control Managing a CSD (Data) Call The G24 working modes can be divided into two modes of operation. • Data Mode: In this mode, once the G24 has established a link with the remote modem, it does not respond to any data passing through it (except for the Escape Sequence search). The G24 becomes a transparent link, connecting the terminal with the remote side. • Command Mode: In this mode, the G24 responds to the AT commands issued by the terminal.
PAGE 100

Call Control Switching From Data Mode to Command Mode To switch the connection from Data mode to Command mode, send the Escape Sequence command (+++). If the modem responds with "OK" to the Escape command, the modem is in Command mode and the dial connection is still active, and you can use the AT command set. Note: The character '+' in the Escape Sequence pattern can be changed using the S2 S-register. Refer to “S, Bit Map Registers”, page 3-285.
PAGE 101

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Call Control AT Commands D, Dial Command This command places a FAX/DATA/VOICE call on the current network. The default call type is a data call (CSD). If the +FCLASS command was used to set the call type to be FAX, then the outgoing call is a fax call. There must be an explicit request in order to make a VOICE call. This request bypasses the +FCLASS setting.
PAGE 102

Call Control The following table shows the D parameters. Table 3-4: D Parameters Description Valid phone digits are: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * # + and, The following characters are ignored: A B C D - () / and . The comma <,> digit: When dialing a voice call, digits until the comma are considered addressing information (phone number). Any digits after the comma are sent as DTMF tones after the voice call is connected. More than one comma causes a pause in sending the tones.
PAGE 103

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows a detailed description for the D> commands. Command Detailed Description D>[;] Originates a call to a phone number with the corresponding alphanumeric field . The Current Phone Book (Set by +CPBS) is searched for the entry that begins with the alphanumeric pattern . D>mem[;] Originates a call to a phone number in memory (phone book) mem and stored in entry location .
PAGE 104

Call Control atd>1; OK OK ath NO CARRIER OK atd>1 +CME ERROR: atd>"Motorola Internal" +CME ERROR: //Speed dial from phonebook //Speed dial from phonebook //Invalid characters in dial string //Invalid characters in dial string For more examples, refer to “Call Control” on page 4-14 and “Data Call” on page 4-18. DL, Dial Last Number The DL command places a data/voice call to the last number dialed. The call progress information (success/failure) is reported in the same way as for the Dial command.
PAGE 105

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference • ATDL; (Voice) dials the exact number that was last dialed, including the DTMF tones sent. • ATDL (Data/Fax) dials the addressing information only (comma and tones are discarded). • If ATDL is sent before any Dial command was issued (mainly after Power On, when the last number is an empty field), the G24 will return NO CARRIER, as mentioned in the ITU V.25-ter standard.
PAGE 106

Call Control Call State Response/Action Single Active and Waiting Call Single Active released (waiting not affected) MTPY Active and Waiting Call MTPY Active released (waiting not affected) Single Held or MTPY Held Error 3 Single (or MTPY) Active and Single (or MTPY) Held Single (or MTPY) Active released Held (Single or MTPY) and Waiting Call Waiting call released Single (or MTPY) Active and Single (or MTPY) Held & Waiting call Single (or MTPY) Active released Example RING //Incoming call RIN
PAGE 107

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference A, Answer Incoming Call This command answers an incoming VOICE/DATA/FAX call after a RING/+CRING indication is sent to the terminal. If the incoming call is answered (connected), the G24 sends a CONNECT notification to the terminal. If the MT call fails, the possible notifications are: • NO CARRIER - Connection Failure • ERROR - General Failure Note: A waiting call (an incoming call while a call is in progress) is announced by +CCWA rather than RING.
PAGE 108

Call Control Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +CRC=[] OK The Set command enables/disables the extended format of an incoming call indication. When enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the terminal with an unsolicited result code +CRING: instead of the normal RING. Read +CRC? +CRC: OK The Read command queries the current settings for the cellular result code. Test +CRC=? +CRC: (list of supported s) The Test command returns the possible values.
PAGE 109

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference RING AT+CRC=1 OK +CRING: REL ASYNC +CRING: REL ASYNC ath AT+CRC=1 OK fax machine +CRING: ALT Voice/Fax NO CARRIER OK //Enable extended ring format //Mobile fax call terminated (multi-numbered scheme) from PSTN +CLIP, Calling Line Identification This command controls the Calling Line Identity (CLI) presentation indication to the terminal when an incoming call is detected by the G24.
PAGE 110

Call Control The following table shows the +CLIP parameters. Table 3-8: +CLIP Parameters Description Enables/disables the CLI presentation indication after the ring indication: 0 Disable CLI presentation 1 Enable CLI presentation The default is 0. Shows the subscriber CLIP service status in the network: 0 CLIP not provisioned 1 CLIP provisioned 2 Unknown (for example, no network and so on) <"number"> Calling line number. The number format is specified by .
PAGE 111

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CCWA, Call Waiting Command This command controls the Call Waiting supplementary service, including the settings and the queries of the G24 and the network. When the Call Waiting indication is enabled by the G24 and there is a waiting call, a +CCWA: indication is sent from the G24 to the terminal. Note: The G24 supports only one of the services at a time: Voice, Data or Fax. Multiparty is a voice-only functionality.
PAGE 112

Call Control The following table shows the +CCWA parameters. Table 3-9: +CCWA Parameters Description Enables/disables the call waiting indication to the terminal by the G24. 0 - Disable 1 - Enable The default is 0. Call waiting service request to the network. When the parameter is not given, the network is not interrogated. 0 - Disable 1 - Enable 2 - Query status Sum of integers each representing a class of information.
PAGE 113

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference OK Examples of +CCWA set command - network interrogation AT+CCWA=1,2 //Class parameter is considered as 7 +CCWA: 1,1 //Call waiting is active for class 1, voice +CCWA: 2,0 //Call waiting is not active for class 2, data +CCWA: 4,0 //Call waiting is not active for class 4, fax OK AT+CCWA=1,2,2 //Class parameter is 2 +CCWA: 2,0 //Call waiting is not active for class 2, data +CCWA: 4,0 //Call waiting is not active for class 4, fax OK AT+CCWA=1,1 OK //Enable the call waiting fea
PAGE 114

Call Control disconnected or separated (removed from the MTPY call, but remain connected to the served mobile subscriber).The maximum number of remote parties is 5. In this command, the term CALL refers to a single or MTPY call. A single Active call is considered a MTPY call with one call index numbered as 1.
PAGE 115

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +CHLD actions according to state and operation: Table 3-11: +CHLD Actions According to Call State and Operation CHLD Call State 0 -Release Held Call 1 - Release Active Call, Accept Held Call 1x - Release Active/Held Call x from MTPY Call 2 - Switch Between Held and Active Call 2x - Active MTPY Call to Hold, Except for Call x 3 - Add Held Call to Active Call IDLE Error 3 Single Active Call Error 3. Releases active call.
PAGE 116

Call Control Table 3-11: +CHLD Actions According to Call State and Operation (Cont.) CHLD 0 -Release Held Call 1 - Release Active Call, Accept Held Call 1x - Release Active/Held Call x from MTPY Call 2 - Switch Between Held and Active Call Held (Single or MTPY) Call and Waiting Call Releases waiting call. Accepts waiting call. Error 3. Accepts waiting call. Error 3. Error 3. Single (or MTPY) Active Call and Single (or MTPY) Held and Waiting Call Releases waiting call.
PAGE 117

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference OK +CCWA: "055728386",129,1,"",0 //Waiting call alerts AT+CHLD=1//Release the active call, accept the waiting call OK NO CARRIER//Active 9311234567 was released OK //Waiting 055728386 was answered +CCFC, Call Forwarding Number and Conditions This command enables control of the call-forwarding supplementary service. Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query are supported.
PAGE 118

Call Control The following table shows the +CCFC parameters. Table 3-12: +CCFC Parameters Description 0 - Unconditional 1 - Mobile busy 2 - No reply 3 - Not reachable 4 - All call forwarding 5 - All conditional call forwarding 0 - Disable 1 - Enable 2 - Query status 3 - Registration 4 - Erasure <"number"> Calling line number. The number format is specified by . Type of address octet in integer format-.
PAGE 119

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+CCFC=? +CCFC: (0,1,2,3,4,5) OK AT+CCFC=0,3,"01256316830",129,1 OK AT+CCFC=1,3,"0545658278",129,1 //Register UC forward-to of all classes. OK AT+CCFC=1,1 //Activate UC forward-to of all classes. OK AT+CCFC=1,2 //Interrogate reason not-reachable of all classes. +CCFC: 1,1,"+97254151200",145 +CCFC: 0,2,"",0 +CCFC: 0,4,"",0 OK //For =3, forward only voice calls is activated. AT+CCFC=4,2 //Interrogate reason all-call-forwarding for all classes.
PAGE 120

Call Control the Temporary mode state. This can also be done when the service is in state B and the terminal wants to disable the CLI presentation (turn CLIR on) for a single call. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +CLIR= OK The Set command instructs the G24 to enable/disable CLI restriction for all MO calls. Read +CLIR? +CLIR:, OK The Read command returns the current setting of CLIR on the network and on the G24 .
PAGE 121

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference ath NO CARRIER OK AT+CLIR=0 OK atd054565195; //MO voice call OK (… calling …) (… a G24 that has 054565195 SIM and is CLIP enabled will receive the following on the terminal: RING +CLIP: "054565006",129,,128,"",0 RING +CLIP: "054565006",129,,128,"",0 …) ath NO CARRIER OK +CBST, Select Bearer Service Type This command sets the GSM bearer service (data circuit duplex asynchronous and synchronous).
PAGE 122

Call Control The following table shows the +CBST parameters. Table 3-14: +CBST Parameters Description 0 - Auto-bauding (automatic selection of the speed; this setting is possible in case of 3.1 kHz modem and non-transparent service) 6 - 4800 bps (V.32) 7 - 9600 bps (V.32) 14 - 14400 bps (V.34) 68 - 2400 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing) 70 - 4800 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing) 71 - 9600 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing) 75 - 14400 bps (V.110 or X.
PAGE 123

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The ESC command +++, transfers the phone to the Command mode (able to input AT commands, while preserving the Data call). The O command returns the phone to the fully Online Data mode (as it was before using the ESC command). Note: The escape character '+' can be changed using the S2-register. The time delay between consecutive escape characters is configured using the S12-register.
PAGE 124

Call Control +CSNS, Single Numbering Call Scheme This command handles the selection of the bearer or teleservice to be used when a mobile terminated single numbering scheme call is established. If the calling party specifies the required bearer capability, this capability is used for the call setup attempt. If the calling party does not specify the required bearer capability (for example, because the call originated in the PSTN), the network attempts to determine it, as described below.
PAGE 125

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the AT+CSNS parameters. Table 3-15: +CSNS Parameters Description CSNS mode: 0 - Voice (default) 2 - Fax (TS 62) 4 - Data Defines for how long to save the new setting: 0 One shot (new setting is not saved) 1 CSNS mode is saved until new +CSNS set command is issued or next power cycle, whichever occurs first. 2 CSNS mode is saved until new +CSNS set command is issued.
PAGE 126

Call Control The only +CBST parameter that needs mapping for mobile terminated calls is , as described in the table below. The V.110 protocol is replaced by the analog protocol regardless of the +CBST setting. All other parameters are set by the +CBST command. Table 3-16: Mapping Table (V.34) +CBST setting Mapped value for mobile terminated call 0 autobauding 4 2400 bps (V.22bis) 6 4800 bps (V.32) 7 9600 bps (V.32) 14 14400 bps (V.34) 68 2400 bps (V.110 or X.
PAGE 127

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+MDC=? +MDC: (0-1) OK AT+MDC=1 OK ATD; OK CONNECT AT+MDC? +MDC: 1 OK AT+MDC=0 OK ATD; OK OK AT+MDC? +MDC: 0 OK +CTFR1, Divert an Incoming Call When User Busy This command terminates an incoming call and diverts the caller to the number previously defined in CCFC, or to a voice mail if one exists for the subscriber. This is done by sending a user-defined User Busy message to the network.
PAGE 128

Call Control +MFIC, Filtering Incoming Calls This command instructs the G24 to query or set Filtering Incoming Calls parameters. The command is a "none basic" command and will not work if SIM card is not present or if SIM card is not in READY state. MFIC parameters are saved after power cycle. This feature is not active by default, however, changing the FLEX can activate it.
PAGE 129

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MFIC parameters. Table 3-17: +MFIC Parameters Description This parameter hold the state of the feature: 0 Filtering is enabled 1 Filtering is disabled (default value) Sets the phonebook to be searched when there is an incoming call: SM Search will be done on SIM phonebook only. (Default value) ME Search will be done on G24 internal phone book only. MT Search will be done on both G24 internal and SIM phone books.
PAGE 130

Call Control +MHUP, Motorola Hung UP call This command hung up specific call or all calls, and report a specific disconnect cause to the NW. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+MHUP= [,] OK or: +CME ERROR: Test AT+MHUP=? +MHUP:(1,16,17,18,27,3 Show list of supported 's and list of supported 's. 1),(0-7) OK The following table shows the +MHUP parameters.
PAGE 131

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MVC, Motorola Vocoders Configuration This AT command is used to choose and configure the priority order of the supported voice codecs (vocoders). The phone will restart 10 seconds after the set command execution completed. Changes take effect after restart.
PAGE 132

Call Control The meaning of the AT+MVC=1,1,3,5 command is: The modem is able to support GSM full rate speech version 1, GSM full rate speech version 2 (EFR), GSM half rate speech version 3 (AMR Half Rate) only: • GSM full rate speech version 1 is the first priority • GSM full rate speech version 2 (EFR) is the second priority • GSM half rate speech version 3 (AMR Half Rate) is the third priority The GSM half rate speech version 1 and GSM full rate speech version 3 (AMR Full Rate) will not be supported by
PAGE 133

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MTTY parameters. Table 3-20: +MTTY Parameters Description 0 1 Normal voice mode. Full TTY mode (both uplink and downlink support TTY data; used when both side parties are deaf). VCO mode (Voice Carry Over- uplink is voice active downlink is TTY). HCO mode (Hearing Carry Over-downlink is voice active uplink is TTY). 2 3 The default value: • On Power Up - as previously saved in FLEX bytes.
PAGE 134

Call Control OK AT+MTTY? +MTTY: 1 OK Call Status Messages +CPAS, Phone Activity Status This command displays the current activity status of the G24, for example, call in progress, or ringing. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Execute/Read AT+CPAS AT+CPAS? +CPAS: OK or: +CME ERROR: Test AT+CPAS=? +CPAS: (list of supported s) OK or: +CME ERROR: Remarks The Execute and Read commands return the activity status of the G24. They can be used to interrogate the G24.
PAGE 135

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CPAS: 4 OK AT+CPAS +CPAS: 4 OK //Voice call active state +CLCC, List Current Calls This command displays a list of all current G24 calls and their statuses, and also enables/disables the unsolicited indication of the call list. (If no calls are received, no information response is sent to the terminal.) If the command succeeds but no calls are available, no information response is sent to the terminal.
PAGE 136

Call Control The following table shows the +CLCC parameters. Table 3-22: +CLCC Parameters Description 0 Disable CLCC unsolicited indication 1 Enable CLCC unsolicited indication The default value is 0.
PAGE 137

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CLCC: 0 OK AT+CLCC=1 //Example with unsolicited indication OK ATD055490698; OK +CLCC: 1,0,2,0,0,"055490698",129,"Alpha" +CLCC: 1,0,3,0,0,"055490698",129," Alpha " OK +CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"055490698",129," Alpha " ATH NO CARRIER OK +CLCC: 1,0,6,0,0,"055490698",129," Alpha +MCST, Call Status Messages This command displays the current state of the call processing, and also enables/disables the unsolicited indication of any change in the call processing state.
PAGE 138

Call Control +MCST Parameters The following table shows the +MCST parameters.
PAGE 139

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MCST: 3 +MCST: 17 NO CARRIER +MCST: 1 +TCLCC, List Current Calls This command displays a list of all current G24 calls and their statuses, and also enables/disables the unsolicited indication of the call list. This command is operational only with specific Telematics products. Operation of this command is flex dependant. Command Type August 5, 2008 Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+TCLCC= OK Set unsolicited reporting on/off.
PAGE 140

Call Control The following table shows the +TCLCC parameters. Table 3-24: +TCLCC Parameters Description 0 Disable TCLCC unsolicited indication (Default). 1 Enable TCLCC unsolicited indication. Integer type, call identification number.
0 Mobile originated call (MO) 1 Mobile terminated call (MT).
PAGE 141

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference OK +TCLCC: 1,0,4,1,0,,"035659801",1 // Call on hold ATD0502147270; // Dial to another phone OK +TCLCC: 2,0,1,1,0,,"0502147270",1 +TCLCC: 2,0,2,1,0,,"0502147270",1 OK +TCLCC: 2,0,3,1,0,,"0502147270",1 AT+CHLD=3 OK +TCLCC: 1,0,3,1,1,,"035659801",1 +TCLCC: 2,0,3,1,1,,"0502147270",1 ATH NO CARRIER +TCLCC: 1,0,0,1,0,16,"035659801",1 NO CARRIER OK +TCLCC: 2,0,0,1,0,16,"0502147270",1// MT Call +TCLCC: 1,1,6,1,0,,"0502147270",3 RING RING ATA OK +TCLCC: 1,1,3,1,0,,"0502147270",3 ATH
PAGE 142

Call Control The following table shows the +MNTFY parameters. Table 3-25: +MNTFY Parameters Description A unique number that identifies a control mode of unsolicited NOTIFY report: 0 - Disable. 1 - Enabled Call identification number: 1-7 A unique number that identifies a notify description: 0 - Suspend. 1 - Resumed. 2 - Bearer Change.
PAGE 143

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Call Advice of Charge Commands This set of commands enables GSM operators to offer Advice of Charge (AoC) services that calculate call charges. These charges are expressed in terms of home units. +CAOC, Advice of Charge This command displays information about the cost of calls. If supported, this command also activates/deactivates unsolicited event reporting of the CCM (Current Call Meter) information.
PAGE 144

Call Control • In IDLE state - returns the last call cost. • In a voice/data state - returns the accumulated cost, including the current call. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +CAOC[=] OK or: [+CAOC:] or: +CME ERROR: Read +CAOC? +CAOC +CAOC: The Read command returns the current CAOC mode.
PAGE 145

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CAOC: "000009" OK +CCCM: "00000e" +CCCM: "000016" AT+CAOC +CAOC: "00001d" OK +CCCM: "00001e" +CCCM: "000027" AT+CAOC=0 +CAOC: "00002d" OK AT+CAOC=2 OK +CCCM: "00003d" AT+CAOC +CAOC: "00003f" OK +CCCM: "000046" AT +CCCM: "00004e" +CAOC +CAOC: "00004f" OK +CCCM: "000056" AT+CAOC +CAOC: "00005d" OK +CCCM: "00005e" NO CARRIER AT+CAOC +CAOC: "000066" OK //567 (prepaid SIM value) - 102 (price per call unit by provider) x 66 (call units) = 465 left in prepaid SIM OK There is now
PAGE 146

Call Control Refer to “+CAMM, Accumulated Call Meter Maximum”, page 3-58. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action +CACM= Remarks OK The Set command resets the +CME ERROR: accumulated call meter value. SIM PIN2 is required. Read +CACM? +CACM: The Read command displays the +CME ERROR: current value of ACM. Test +CACM=? OK The Test command indicates whether the +CACM command is functioning. The following table shows the +CACM parameters.
PAGE 147

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Set Syntax +CAMM=[,] Response/Action Remarks OK The Set command sets the +CME ERROR: accumulated call meter maximum value. SIM PIN2 is required. The value that is set remains after a power cycle. Note: This command is activated if Advice of Charge is supported by the network. Read +CAMM? +CAMM: The Read command displays the +CME ERROR: current value of ACMmax.
PAGE 148

Call Control +CPUC, Price per Unit and Currency Table This command sets the parameters of the Advice of Charge-related price per unit and currency table found in the SIM file, EFPUCT. PUCT information is used to convert the home units (used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM) into currency units. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action +CPUC=, , Remarks OK The Set command sets the price per +CME ERROR: unit and the currency table. SIM PIN2 is required.
PAGE 149

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Note: If contains a dot, a maximum of three digits may appear after the dot, otherwise an error is generated. For example, if =0.61, the Read command displays 0.610. =1.2345 terminates in an error. If does not contain a dot, the number is divided by 1000. For example, if =1, the Read command displays 0.001. Due to storage constraints, the value is limited to a range of 0 to 4095. Values beyond this range may result in rounding errors.
PAGE 150

Call Control Example AT+CR=1 OK ATD1234567890 +CR: REL ASYNC //Enable reporting Supplementary Services This set of commands enables control over supplementary service notifications, including Structured and Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD) data. +CSSN, Supplementary Service Notifications This command handles the enabling and disabling of supplementary service-related, network-initiated, notifications.
PAGE 151

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +CSSN parameters. Table 3-31: +CSSN Parameters Description Sets/displays the +CSSI result code presentation status. This value must be specified. 0 Disable (default) 1 Enable Sets/displays the +CSSU result code presentation status. This value is optional, but cannot be specified without .
PAGE 152

Call Control Table 3-33: +CSSU Notification Values (Cont.) Value Description G24 Support 5 Call on hold has been released (during a voice call; not a supplementary service notification) Yes 6 Forward check supplementary service message received (can be received at any time) Yes 7 Call is being connected with the remote party in an alerted state using an explicit call transfer operation (during a voice call).
PAGE 153

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CUSD, Unstructured Supplementary Service Data This command allows control of Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD), according to GSM 02.90. Both network and mobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter is used to disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSD response from the network, or network initiated operation) +CUSD: [,,] to the TE. In addition, value =2 is used to cancel an ongoing USSD session.
PAGE 154

Call Control Table 3-34: +CUSD Parameters (Cont.) Description GSM 03.38 - Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format. The supported value are: 17 - USC2 Language Indicator. (The first character in a USC2 Lang IND has the language ID in it. This situation is not defined by the GSM 7.07 or the 3GPP 27.007 so the assuming that the first character should have the correctly formatted and packed language ID already in it). 72 - USC2 (16 bit). 68 - 8 bit.
PAGE 155

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+CUSD=1,"*00*0549598743#" +CUSD: 0,"Connecting...
PAGE 156

Call Control Table 3-35: CUSD Termination Cause Table Index (Cont.
PAGE 157

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-35: CUSD Termination Cause Table Index (Cont.) Termination Cause Index NBR_SN_EXCEEDED 73 NBR_USER_EXCEEDED 74 Call Control by SIM Causes NOT_ALLOWED_BY_CC 75 MODIFIED_TO_SS_BY_CC 76 MODIFIED_TO_CALL_BY_CC 77 CALL_MODIFIED_BY_CC 78 App.
PAGE 158

Call Control The following table shows the +COLP parameters. Table 3-36: +COLP Parameters Description Sets/displays the result code presentation status of the G24. 0 Disable (default) 1 Enable Displays the subscriber’s COLP service status in the network. 0 COLP not provisioned 1 COLP provisioned 2 Unknown (for example, no network, and so on) Sets the phone number, using the format specified by .
PAGE 159

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Phone and Date Books and Clock Directory Access Commands - Phone Book This set of commands enables read/write access to the phone book contained within the G24, including both the numeric and the alpha information contained in the location. The presentation is according to GSM 07.07. In some cases, it may be possible to use these commands to access the dialed and received call stacks. However, as these phone books cannot be edited, the +CPBW command does not work on them.
PAGE 160

Phone and Date Books and Clock The following table shows the +CPBS parameters. Table 3-37: +CPBS Parameters Description List of supported phone books and their storage IDs AD Abbreviated dialing numbers. DC ME dialed calls list (+CPBW is not applicable for this storage). EN SIM emergency numbers (+CPBW is not applicable for this storage). FD SIM Fixed dialing phone book. MC G24 missed (unanswered received) calls list (+CPBW may not be applicable for this storage). ME G24 phone book.
PAGE 161

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference AT+CPBW=1,"034546565",129,"xyz"// Write into FD storage OK AT+CPBS="FD","" +CME ERROR: incorrect password AT+CPBS="AD","" +CME ERROR: operation not allowed AT+CPBS="FD","" +CME ERROR: text string too long +CPBR, Read Phone Book Entries This command recalls phone book entries from a specific entry number or from a range of entries. If only one entry is specified, and that entry is empty, OK is returned.
PAGE 162

Phone and Date Books and Clock The following table shows the +CPBR parameters. Table 3-38: +CPBR Parameters Description Index for a given phone book entry Phone number of a given entry The address type of a phone number 129 Use for local call 145 Use “+” for international access code 128 Unknown "128" is used to represent an email address or a mailing list. In this case, can be used to further differentiate between the two.
PAGE 163

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CPBF, Find Phone Book Entries This execution command enables the user to search for a particular entry, by name, in the currently active phone book. If no matching entry is found, the command returns OK. If multiple matches are found, all are returned. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Set +CPBF= [+CPBF: ,,,[[...
PAGE 164

Phone and Date Books and Clock +CPBF: 2,"8475767800",129,"Moto Voicemail" +CPBF: 101,"+97252999080",145,"Voice Mail" OK AT+CPBF="Moto" +CPBF: 2,"8475767800",129,"Moto Voicemail" +CPBW, Write Phone Book Entry This command enables the user to store a new entry in the phone book, or edit/delete an existing entry from the phone book. A particular entry in the phone book can be stored, or the next available entry is used.
PAGE 165

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +CPBW parameters. Table 3-40: +CPBW Parameters Description Index for a given phone book entry Phone number of a given entry The address type of a phone number 129 Use for local call 145 Use “+” for international access code 128 Unknown Note: "128" is used to represent an email address or a mailing list. In this case, can be used to further differentiate between the two.
PAGE 166

Phone and Date Books and Clock Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Read +CSVM? +CSVM:, The Read command displays the currently selected voice mail number , and status (enabled or disabled). +CME ERROR: Test +CSVM=? +CSVM: (list of supported The Test command displays the list of s), (list of supported supported s and s. s) +CME ERROR: The following table shows the +CSVM parameters.
PAGE 167

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference In MUX mode, this AT command is allowed on DLC2 only. Command Type August 5, 2008 Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +MDSI= When mode is 1 and SIM was invalidated or deactivated: [+MDSI: , , , ] OK +CME ERROR: The following is the available mode values for the Set command. = 1 - Defines that unsolicited +MDSI messages will be sent to the DTE.
PAGE 168

Phone and Date Books and Clock The following table shows the +MDSI parameters. Table 3-42: +MDSI Parameters Description 0 1 Unsolicited indications off Unsolicited indications on , 0 1 2 "DEACTIVATE". SIM deactivate request was sent with "GSM". Invalidate SIM for GSM services was sent with "GPRS".
PAGE 169

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference OK AT+MDSI=? +MDSI: (000,001) OK AT+MDSI=1 OK //Until now there was no deactivation or invalidation of SIM card.
PAGE 170

Phone and Date Books and Clock If only a pair of and values are given, then the Set command is interpreted as follows: • = 0, = any valid indexSet mode for given index to 0 • = 1, = any valid indexSet mode for given index to 1 If only , and values are given, then the Set command is interpreted as follows: • Store in of EFmsisdn in the SIM, the .
PAGE 171

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MCSN parameters. Table 3-43: +MCSN Parameters Description This value defines whether and corresponding tag are presented after entering a correct PIN number. 0 Do not show and in after entering correct PIN number 1 Show and in after entering correct PIN number The default value is 0 (before MCSN has been set for the first time.
PAGE 172

Phone and Date Books and Clock +CNUM: "PIN2","8523",129 +CNUM: "","",0 OK AT+MCSN? +MCSN: 1 OK // Restart Phone AT+CPIN="1111" OK // Unsolicited information of record 1 in EFmsisdn in the SIM +MCSN: "VOICE","054444444" AT+MCSN=0 // Disable unsolicited indication OK // Restart Phone AT+CPIN="1111" OK AT+MCSN=0,3,,"ada" ERROR AT+MCSN=0,3,"3456346" // Update the of record 3 same OK AT+CNUM // Reading EFmsisdn from the SIM +CNUM: "VOICE","054444444",129 +CNUM: "OFFICE","039999999",129 +CNUM: "
PAGE 173

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MPDPM, Motorola Phonebook Dynamic Percentage Memory This command returns the collective percentage of memory used by the phonebook and datebook in their shared dynamic memory storage. A single percentage value is returned representing the combined percentage used by both the phonebook and datebook.
PAGE 174

Phone and Date Books and Clock OK AT+CPBW=,"035658027",129,"Phone7" OK AT+CPBW=,"035658028",129,"Phone8" OK AT+CPBW=,"035658029",129,"Phone9" OK AT+CPBW=,"035658030",129,"Phone10" OK AT+MPDPM? +MPDPM: 2 OK Directory Access Commands - Date Book +MALARM, Date Book Reminder Unsolicited Report This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal indicating a date book reminder is activated. Note: The date book reminder is accompanied by alert. The alert is not programmable.
PAGE 175

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-45: +MALARM Parameters Description A time length of the reminder in minutes' values. Number in 0-997920 range. A schedule multiple recurring instances. 0 - None. 1 - Daily. 2 - Weekly. 3 - Monthly on day (for example: 2nd Wednesday each month). 4 - Monthly on date (for example: every 15th of the month).
PAGE 176

Phone and Date Books and Clock OK AT+MALMH +CME ERROR: operation not allowed +MDBGD, Defines General Setting for Date Book This command defines the general setting. It influences on the behavior of all the reminders. The changes of are not applied until the next time the phone is power cycled. This command is a non-basic command, which means that the G24 module rejects the command with an appropriate error message when the SIM is not present and/or the phone is in lock state.
PAGE 177

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MDBGD parameters. Table 3-46: +MDBGD Parameters Description Auto-delete The period that date book entry is stored after the reminder has occurred. 0 - Never perform auto-delete. 1 - Delete after 1 week. 2 - Delete after 2 weeks. 4 - Delete after 4 weeks. 8 - Delete after 8 weeks. The default value: On Power Up: as previously saved in date book. Before set command first used: 4. Rate A time interval in 1 second units.
PAGE 178

Phone and Date Books and Clock This command is a non-basic command, which means that the G24 module rejects the command with an appropriate error message when the SIM is not present and/or the phone is in lock state. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +MDBR=[,] +MDBR:,"", "","", <Duration>,<Repeat>, "<Exceptions>" OK or: +CME ERROR: <error_code> The Set command returns date book entries.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-179.html">PAGE 179</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-47: +MDBR Parameters <Parameter> Description Exceptions A list of exception instance numbers for the requested entry. Numbers in 0-65534 range. Entries Total number of date book. Used Number of entries currently used. tLength The maximum number of characters in the <Title> entry. mException The maximum number of exceptions. Actions The maximum number of actions.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-180.html">PAGE 180</a></h6> <p>Phone and Date Books and Clock This command is a non-basic command, which means that the G24 module rejects the command with an appropriate error message when the SIM is not present and/or the phone is in lock state.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-181.html">PAGE 181</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-48: +MDBW Parameters <Parameter> Description Repeat A schedule multiple recurring instances. 0 - None (Default). 1 - Daily. 2 - Weekly. 3 - Monthly on day (for example: 2nd Wednesday each month). 4 - Monthly on date (for example: every 15th of the month). If on days that do not occur each mount such as the 29th, 30th, or 31st, the reminder is activated on the last week day of the month. 5 - Yearly. tLength The maximum number of characters in the <Title> entry.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-182.html">PAGE 182</a></h6> <p>Phone and Date Books and Clock This command is a non-basic command, which means that the G24 module rejects the command with an appropriate error message when the SIM is not present and/or the phone is in lock state.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-183.html">PAGE 183</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The third example illustrates delete exception instance 4 from entry error case, because the entry is non-repeating. The AT+CMEE=2 command enables verbose error report. AT+CMEE=2 OK AT+MDBW=1,"13:30","07/02/15","Wake Up Phone",1,0 OK AT+MDBWE=2,1,4 +CME Error: operation not allowed The fourth example illustrates delete entry 1 from date book success case. AT+MDBWE=0,1 OK AT+MDBR=1,10 OK The fifth example illustrates test command success case.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-184.html">PAGE 184</a></h6> <p>Phone and Date Books and Clock System Date and Time Access Commands +CCLK, Read/Set System Date and Time This command reads and sets the G24 current date, time and time zone. Command Type Set Syntax +CCLK=<time> Response/Action Remarks OK The Set command sets the date, time and time zone of the system clock. or: +CME ERROR: <err> Note: Set Command sets user defined system clock values and saves them in the NVM memory. These saved values are kept after power-cycle as well.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-185.html">PAGE 185</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +CCLK parameters. Table 3-50: +CCLK Parameters <Parameter> <time> Description ASCII string of format: yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz or yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss yy - 2-digit year [2000-2069] MM - 2-digit month [01-12] dd - 2-digit day of month [00-31] hh - 2-digit hour [00-23] mm - 2-digit minute [00-59] ss - 2-digit seconds [00-59] zz - (optional) time zone offset from GMT, in quarter-hours [-47...+48].</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-186.html">PAGE 186</a></h6> <p>SMS SMS SMS Commands G24 supports SMS PDU and SMS TEXT mode according to ETSI specifications 07.05 & 3.40. +CSMS, Select Message Service. This command handles the selection of the messaging service. It returns the types of messages that are supported by the G24. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +CSMS=<service> +CSMS: The Set command sets the type of service and returns the types of <mt>,<mo>,<bm> messages supported by the G24.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-187.html">PAGE 187</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+CSMS=128 +CSMS: 001,001,001 OK AT+CSMS? +CSMS: 128,001,001,001 OK AT+CSMS=? +CSMS: (128) OK +CPMS, Preferred Message Storage This command handles the selection of the preferred message storage area. The message storage area is divided into three parts, mem1, mem2 and mem3. Command Type August 5, 2008 Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +CPMS=<mem1> [,<mem2>[,<mem 3>]] +CPMS: The Set command sets the memory <used1>,<total1>,<used2>, storage.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-188.html">PAGE 188</a></h6> <p>SMS The following table shows the +CPMS parameters. Table 3-52: +CPMS Parameters <Parameter> Description <mem1> memory from which messages are read and deleted. Supported values are: "MT","SM","ME","BM". The default value at power-up is "MT". <mem2> memory to which writing operation is made. Supported value is: "ME". The default value at power-up is "ME". <mem3> memory to which received SMS are stored (unless forwarded directly to TE). Supported value is: "SM". The default value at power-up is "SM".</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-189.html">PAGE 189</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CMGF, Message Format This command is a basic command. The Set command handles the selection of the message format used with send, list, read and write commands, as well as the format of unsolicited result codes resulting from message receipts. The G24 supports both PDU mode (where entire TP data units are used) and text mode (where the body of the message and its headers are given as separate parameters).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-190.html">PAGE 190</a></h6> <p>SMS The following table shows the +CSCA input characters and their hexadecimal values.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-191.html">PAGE 191</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +CSCA=<sca>[,<tosca>] OK The Set command sets the service center address. or: +CMS ERROR: <err> Read +CSCA? +CSCA: <sca>,<tosca> Test The Test command for +CSCA is not defined by ETSI, and therefore is not supported by the G24. The G24 returns an error. The following table shows the +CSCA parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-192.html">PAGE 192</a></h6> <p>SMS +CSMP, Set Text Mode Parameters This command is a basic command and is used to select values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent to the network or placed in storage when TEXT mode is selected. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action +CSMP=[<fo>[,<vp> [,<pid>[,<dcs>]]]] Remarks OK The set command selects values for additional parameters needed when SM is or: sent to the network or placed in storage +CMS ERROR: <err> when text format message mode is selected.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-193.html">PAGE 193</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-56: +CSMP Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> Description <pid> Protocol-Identifier. The one octet information element by which the SM-TL either refers to the higher layer protocol being used, or indicates interworking with a certain type of telematic device. "0 - no interworking, SME-to-SME protocol (default) "Any value between 0-255 will be accepted. The SC may reject messages with a TP-Protocol-Identifier containing a reserved value or one, which is not supported.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-194.html">PAGE 194</a></h6> <p>SMS +CSDH, Show Text Mode Parameters This command controls whether detailed header information is shown in text mode result codes. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +CSDH=[<show>] OK The set command controls whether detailed header information is shown or: in text mode result codes. +CMS ERROR: <err> Read AT+CSDH? +CSDH: (list of The read command returns the current <show> parameter value. supported <show>s) OK or: +CMS ERROR: <err> The following table shows the +CSDH parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-195.html">PAGE 195</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CNMI, New Message Indications to Terminal This command handles enabling of unsolicited notifications to the terminal when an SM is received by the G24. After sending an unsolicited response to the TE, the G24 will expect a +CNMA (new message acknowledgement) from the TE within a predefined timeout of 60 seconds. The G24 will not send another unsolicited response to the TE before the previous one is acknowledged.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-196.html">PAGE 196</a></h6> <p>SMS AT+CNMI? +CNMI: 0,0,0,0 OK AT+CNMI=3,1 OK AT+CMSS=142,"0544565034" // send to myself +CMSS: 72 OK +CMTI: "SM",15 AT+CNMI=,2 OK AT+CSDH=1 OK AT+CMSS=142,"054565034" // send to myself +CMSS: 73 OK +CMT: "+972544565034",,"04/11/04,09:48:36+08",145,4,0,0,"+97254120032",145,3 ABC AT+CSMP=49 /*Set first octet to status report - see status report parameters in CMGW*/ OK AT+CSMP? +CSMP: 49,167,0,0 OK AT+CNMI=,,,1 OK AT+CNMI? +CNMI: 0,0,0,1,0 OK AT+CNMI=0,0,0,1,0 OK AT+CMGS="0524680592" > HELLO +CMGS: 168 OK +C</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-197.html">PAGE 197</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference When the G24 sends a +CDS response to the terminal, it waits a predefined timeout of 60 seconds for the +CNMA acknowledgment. The G24 will not send another +CDS result code to the terminal before the previous one is acknowledged, or the timeout expires. When the G24 sends a +CMT response to the terminal, it waits a predefined timeout of 60 seconds for the +CNMA acknowledgment.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-198.html">PAGE 198</a></h6> <p>SMS AT+CNMI? +CNMI: 0,0,0,1,0 OK AT+CMSS=295 +CMSS: 184 OK +CDS: 6,184,"+972524680592",145,"05/08/02,17:19:23+08","05/08/02,17:19:24+08",0 AT+CNMA OK AT+CNMI? +CNMI: 0,0,0,1,0 OK +CMTI, Unsolicited Response (New SMS-DELIVER Receipt Indication) The +CMTI unsolicited response is sent to the TE upon receipt of a new SMS-DELIVER SM, if the +CNMI parameter <mt> is set to 1. Refer to “+CNMI, New Message Indications to Terminal” on page 3-107.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-199.html">PAGE 199</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference In text mode: (+CMGF=1): +CMT: <oa>,<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>] <CR><LF><data> (about parameters in italics, refer command Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH). In PDU mode: (+CMGF=0): +CMT: [<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu> The following table shows the +CMT parameters. Table 3-61: +CMT Parameters <Parameter> Description <oa> Message origination address. <scts> Service center time stamp.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-200.html">PAGE 200</a></h6> <p>SMS AT+CMGS=18 // send to myself > 079179521201009511000c917952446505430004AA0441424344 +CMGS: 70 OK +CMT: ,23 0791795212010095040C917952446505430004502032115430800441424344 +CBM, Unsolicited Response (New CB Message Receipt) The +CBM unsolicited response is sent to the TE upon receipt of a new cell broadcast message if +CNMI parameter <bm> is set to 2. Refer to “+CNMI, New Message Indications to Terminal” on page 3-107. This unsolicited message displays the received CB message.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-201.html">PAGE 201</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Unsolicited Response +CDSI: <mem>,<index> The following table shows the +CDSI parameters. Table 3-63: +CDSI Parameters <Parameter> Description <mem> Message memory space. "SM" - SIM memory storage. <index> Location of the new message.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-202.html">PAGE 202</a></h6> <p>SMS The following table shows the +CDS parameters. Table 3-64: +CDS Parameters <Parameter> Description <fo> First octet of the SM <mr> Message Reference <ra> Message Recipient address <tora> Type of Recipient address <scts> Service center time stamp <dt> Discharge-Time <st> Status After sending a +CDS unsolicited response to the TE, the G24 will expect a +CNMA (new message acknowledgement) from the TE within a predefined timeout of 60 seconds.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-203.html">PAGE 203</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The +MMGL command does not change the message status. In addition, +MMGL includes a <stat> selection that can be used to query the G24 for a list of message headers without attendant message data.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-204.html">PAGE 204</a></h6> <p>SMS The following table shows the +CGML/+MMGL parameters. Table 3-65: +CGML/+MMGL Parameters <Parameter> Description <index> 1-352 Index of message in storage.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-205.html">PAGE 205</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+CMGL=? +CMGL: ("REC UNREAD","REC READ","STO UNSENT","STO SENT","ALL") OK AT+MMGL=? +MMGL: ("REC UNREAD","REC READ","STO UNSENT","STO SENT","ALL","HEADER ONLY") OK AT+CPMS="SM" // read messages from SIM.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-206.html">PAGE 206</a></h6> <p>SMS +CMGR, +MMGR, Read Message These commands handle the reading of SMs. The command displays the message in location <index> of the preferred message storage <mem1> (selected using the +CPMS command). If the status of the message is "RECEIVED UNREAD", the +CMGR command changes the status to "RECEIVED READ". The +MMGR command does not change the message status.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-207.html">PAGE 207</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +CMGR parameters. Table 3-66: +CGMR/+MMGR Parameters <Parameter> Description <index> 1-352 Index in storage of the message. to be retrieved.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-208.html">PAGE 208</a></h6> <p>SMS Table 3-66: +CGMR/+MMGR Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> Description <pages> Total number of pages <mr> Message Reference <ra> Message Recipient address <tora> Type of Recipient address <scts> Service center time stamp <dt> Discharge-Time <st> Status Table 3-67: Layout of SMS-DELIVER in PDU Mode (according to GSM03.40) Reference Description Length <sca> Service Center address: 1 BYTE: length (number of followed octets).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-209.html">PAGE 209</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-68: <fo> for SMS-DELIVER Message Bit/s Reference Description 0-1 Message-Type-Indicator Parameter describing the message type. 0 0 SMS-DELIVER (in the direction SC to MS) 2 TP-More-Message-To-Send Parameter indicating whether or not more messages are waiting to the MS in the SC.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-210.html">PAGE 210</a></h6> <p>SMS Table 3-69: Layout of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in PDU Mode (according to GSM03.40) (Cont.) Reference Description Length <TP-RA> Mandatory: Recipient address formatted according to the formatting rules of address fields. 2-12 BYTES <TP-SCTS> Mandatory: The TP-Service-Center-Time-Stamp field is given in semi-octet representation, and represents the local time as described in GSM03.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-211.html">PAGE 211</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-70: <fo> for SMS-STATUS-REPORT Message Bit/s Reference Description 0-1 Mandatory: Message-Type-Indicator Parameter describing the message type. 1 0 SMS-STATUS-REPORT (in the direction SC to MS) 2 Mandatory: TP-More-Message-To-Send Parameter indicating whether or not more messages are waiting to the MS in the SC.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-212.html">PAGE 212</a></h6> <p>SMS Example AT+CPMS? +CPMS: "ME",5,59,"ME",5,59,"SM",5,20 OK AT+CMGR=1 +CMS ERROR: invalid index AT+CMGR=142 +CMGR: "STO SENT","054565034", message text OK AT+CSDH=1 OK AT+CMGR=142 +CMGR: "STO SENT","054565034",,129,25,0,0,"05/04/03,21:22:23+08","+ 97254120032",145,<message length> message text OK AT+CMGW=18 > 079179521201009511000c917952428650290004AA0441424344 +CMGW: 143 OK AT+CMGR=143 +CMGR: 2,,23 0791795212010095040C917952428650290004502032110201800441424344 OK AT+CPMS="SM" // change to SM to read SMS-</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-213.html">PAGE 213</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MMAR, Motorola Mark As Read This command handles changing the <stat> attribute of an SM in the G24 memory location <index>, preferred message storage <mem1>, from "REC UNREAD" to "REC READ". (<mem1> is selected using the +CPMS command.) If the status change fails, +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-214.html">PAGE 214</a></h6> <p>SMS When the given index is an incoming message index the header settings will be as follows: • <first-octet> will be SMS-SUBMIT and VPF - relative. • • • • The TP-RP and TP-UDHI settings will be taken from the incoming message's first octet. <vp> - will be set to the default value -167 - as defined in 03.40. <sca>,<tosca>, <pid> and <dcs> will be set according the incoming message parameters. If <da> and/or <toda> are not given by the command, the <oa> and <tooa> will be set instead.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-215.html">PAGE 215</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CMGW, Write Message to Memory This command is used to write and save a message to <mem2>. The message is saved in memory, and the message index is displayed to the user. By default, messages are saved with the status of "STO UNSENT", but status "STO SENT" can be applied using the <stat> parameter. In TEXT mode, the header parameters will be set according to CSMP settings.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-216.html">PAGE 216</a></h6> <p>SMS Table 3-75: Layout of SMS-SUBMIT in PDU Mode: (according to GSM03.40) Reference Description Length <sca> Service Center address: 1 BYTE: length (number of followed octets). Mandatory 1 BYTE: <tosca> - value between 128-255 1, 3-12 BYTES (When length is 1, length BYTE = 0) <fo> First Octet. See the table below. 1 BYTE <TP-MR> Message Reference. An integer representation of a reference number of the SM submitted to the SC by the MS. Values between 0-255.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-217.html">PAGE 217</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-76: Layout of SMS-COMMAND in PDU Mode: (according to GSM03.40) Reference Description Length <TP-CDL> Command data length 1 BYTE <TP-CD> Command data 0-156 BYTES Table 3-77: <fo> for SMS-SUBMIT Message Bit/s August 5, 2008 Reference Description 0-1 Message-Type-Indicator Parameter describing the message type.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-218.html">PAGE 218</a></h6> <p>SMS Table 3-78: <fo> for SMS-COMMAND Message Bit/s Reference Description 0-1 Message-Type-Indicator Parameter describing the message type.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-219.html">PAGE 219</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference 00410042004300440045 OK AT+CSMP=25,"05/03/15,21:22:23+08",0,0 OK AT+CMGW="0544565034" A<CTRL+Z> +CMGW: 129 OK AT+CMGR=129 +CMGR: "STO UNSENT", "0544565034",,129,25,0,0,"05/03/15,21:22:23+08","+972521100059",145,1 A OK AT+CMGF=0 OK AT+CMGR=129 +CMGR: 2,,20 079179521201009519FF0A8150446505430000503051122232800141 AT+CMGW=18 > 0011000c917952428650290004AA0441424344 // SCA is not given +CMGW: 130 OK AT+CMGR=130 +CMGR: 2,,18 079179521201009511000C917952428650290004AA0441424344 O</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-220.html">PAGE 220</a></h6> <p>SMS +CMGD, Delete Message This command handles deletion of a single message from memory location <index>, or multiple messages according to <delflag>. If the optional parameter <delflag> is entered, and is greater than 0, the <index> parameter is practically ignored. If deletion fails, result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Note: The deletion of multiple commands is a time-consuming process that may require more than 60 seconds to complete.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-221.html">PAGE 221</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CGSMS, Select Service for MO SMS Messages This command handles the selection of the service or service preference used by the G24 to send mobile-originated SMS messages. Note: This command is network dependent, which means that the network must support SMS over GPRS. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action +CGSMS=[<service>] Remarks OK The Set command selects the service +CME ERROR: <err> or service preference used to send SMS messages.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-222.html">PAGE 222</a></h6> <p>SMS +CMGS, Send SM to Network This command sends an SM from the G24 to the network. The message reference value <mr> is returned to the G24 upon successful delivery of the message. Valid <toda> will be any value between 128-255. The header parameters in TEXT mode will be set according to CSMP settings.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-223.html">PAGE 223</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference If after aborting AT+CMGS command execution and before result of operation was reported by G24, a second AT+CMGS command is executed, then the result of the second AT+CMGS operation only will be reported by G24. +CSCB, Cell Broadcast Messages This command handles the selection of cell broadcast message types and data coding schemes received by the G24.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-224.html">PAGE 224</a></h6> <p>SMS The following table shows the AT+CSCB parameters. Table 3-82: +CSCB Parameters <Parameter> Description <mode> The current broadcast message mode: 0 MIDs and DCSs accepted 1 MIDs and DCSs not accepted <mids> Cell broadcast message identifiers 0-65534 <dcss> Cell broadcast message data coding schemes 0-255 Notes: • A combination of discrete values or intervals can be entered for <mids> and <dcss>, for example, "0,1,5,320-324,922". • Parameter values must be entered in ascending order.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-225.html">PAGE 225</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference OK Adding channels 3, 4,5,6,22 to mid list and languages 1,8 to dcs list: AT+CSCB=0,"3-6,22","1,8" OK AT+CSCB? +CSCB: 0,"3-6,22","1,8" OK Removing channels 4 and 6 from channel list, and removing dcs 1 from the dcs list: AT+CSCB=1,"4,6","1" OK AT+CSCB? +CSCB: 0,"3,5,22","8" OK Clear all <mids> and <dcss> AT+CSCB=0 / Or AT+CSCB= OK AT+CSCB? +CSCB: 0,"","" OK +MCSAT, Motorola Control SMS Alert Tone This command enables/disables/exercises the SMS alert tone for an arriving SM</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-226.html">PAGE 226</a></h6> <p>SMS The following table shows the +MCSAT parameters. Table 3-83: +MCSAT Parameters <Parameter> 3-138 Description <mode> 0 Suppress alert tone 1 Enable alert tone 2 Play alert tone The default value at power-up is 1. <dcs_mask> SMS data coding-scheme mask. The format is an 8-bit information parameter.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-227.html">PAGE 227</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+MCSAT=? +MCSAT:(0-2) OK AT+MCSAT? +MCSAT: 1 OK AT+MCSAT=2 OK AT+MCSAT=1,00001000 OK AT+MCSAT=1,00000100 OK AT+MCSAT=1,00000000 OK AT+MCSAT=1 OK AT+MCSAT=0 OK // UCS2 // UTF8 // GSM +MEDT, Motorola Enable/Disable Tone This command enables/disables the G24 tones. This command is a basic command. This feature is active by default. In MUX mode, this AT command is allowed on DLC2 only.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-228.html">PAGE 228</a></h6> <p>SMS Command Type 3-140 Syntax Response/Action Remarks Read + MEDT? +MEDT: <mode> OK The read command returns the current setting. Test AT+MEDT=? +MEDT: (list of supported < mode >s ) OK The test command returns the possible ranges of <mode>s.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-229.html">PAGE 229</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MEDT parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-230.html">PAGE 230</a></h6> <p>SMS Table 3-84: +MEDT Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> Description 30 Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable 31 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Default value: On Power Up - as previously saved in FLEX bytes. Before using the set command for the first time, the default value is dependent on the flex in use. Note: All AT+MEDT settings will be saved in FLEX and after power up will behave according to the last setting.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-231.html">PAGE 231</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +TSMSRET, Control SMS Sending Retry This command controls the SMS sending retry. If SMS sending retry is enabled, the ME will retry sending an SMS when the send operation failed due to network or ME failure. If disabled, no retry will be done. Operation of this command is flex dependant.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-232.html">PAGE 232</a></h6> <p>SMS In a case that the RI indication was enabled for one of the above SMS types, the RI line will be asserted once for 1.5 sec. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +MRICS=<n> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The set command sets the RI configuration flag. Read +MRICS? +MRICS: <n> OK The read command displays the current value of the last selected value for +MRICS set command.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-233.html">PAGE 233</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CMGS: 11 OK // RI is asserted for 1.5 seconds // The next example assumes SMS storage is full AT+CMGF=1 // switching to text mode OK AT+CPMS? +CPMS: "MT",20,76,"ME",0,56,"SM",20,20 OK AT+MRICS=1 OK AT+CNMI=,2 OK AT+CNMI? +CNMI: 0,2,0,0,0 // mt = 2 OK AT+CMGS="0544565199" >hi <ctr+z> +CMGS: 12 OK +CMT: "+972544565199",,"07/04/25,12:34:06+08" hi // RI is asserted for 1.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-234.html">PAGE 234</a></h6> <p>SMS Table 3-87 shows the conversion between the <dcs> and +CSCS setting when storing SM to memory or sending SM. Table 3-87: <dcs> field and +CSCS settings conversion when writing SM CASE A <dcs> field Default alphabet User-Data-Hea der Current TE character set (+CSCS) Not Set UTF8 or UCS2 Returns an error since conversion from these character sets to default alphabet is impossible. GSM G24 converts each two IRA characters long hexadecimal number to 7-bit septet.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-235.html">PAGE 235</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-88 shows the conversion between the <dcs> and +CSCS setting when reading SM. Table 3-88: <dcs> field and +CSCS settings conversion when reading SM CASE <dcs> field User-Data-Header Current TE character set Action A Default alphabet Not Set All G24 converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set according to rules of GSM07.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-236.html">PAGE 236</a></h6> <p>SMS OK AT+CMGR=223 +CMGR: "STO UNSENT","0544565803", 050003090301123456786543FE OK AT+CMGF=0 OK AT+CMGR=223 +CMGR: 2,,26 07917952140230F251000A815044658530000AA70D050003090301123456786543FE OK ### Store in TEXT mode SMS 8-bit encoded. ### Character set is ASCII.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-237.html">PAGE 237</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference AT+CMGR=227 +CMGR: "STO UNSENT","0544565803", ADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADAD ADADADADADADADADAD ADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADAD ADADADADADADADADAD OK AT+CMGF=0 OK AT+CMGR=227 +CMGR: 2,,153 07917952140230F211000A8150446585300000A7A041629018240689416290182406894162901824 06894162901824068941629018240689416290182406894162901824068941629018240689416290 1824068941629018240689416290182406894162901824068941629018240689</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-238.html">PAGE 238</a></h6> <p>Email Email Email Services AT Commands +MEMISP, Email Account ISP (Internet Service Provider) Settings This command defines the ISP (Internet Service Provider) setup parameters in order to establish internet connection to apply email services on G24. Note: +MEMISP parameters are saved after the power cycle.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-239.html">PAGE 239</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example: AT+MEMISP=? +MEMISP: (64),(48),(40),(NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN) OK AT+MEMISP="orangeinternet","orange","or1234", "158.43.128.1" OK AT+MEMISP="orangeinternet",,, "267.43.128.1" +CME ERROR: Invalid DNS ip AT+MEMISP? +MEMISP: "orangeinternet","orange","or1234","158.43.128.1" OK +MEMAS, Email Account Settings This command defines the user account setup parameters. This setup is intended to establish email server connection in order to perform send and receive emails operations.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-240.html">PAGE 240</a></h6> <p>Email Command Type Test Syntax AT+MEMAS=? Response/Action Remarks +MEMAS: maximum allowed length for <name>, maximum allowed length of <user_id>, maximum allowed length of <passw>, maximum allowed length of <return_addr>, maximum allowed length of <smtp_host>, list of supported <smtp_port>s values, maximum allowed length of <pop3_host>, list of supported <pop3_port>s values. OK The following table shows the +MEMAS parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-241.html">PAGE 241</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-90: +MEMAS Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> Description <pop3_host> String format. Receiving host - IP addresses or host name for receiving email. (pop3.test.com). Receiving host is a required setting. This setting must be set before the user can access email. The definition of the Receiving Host setting follows the guidelines as defined by RFC1035 (Domain names - implementation and specification).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-242.html">PAGE 242</a></h6> <p>Email 6. If the operation (send or receive) will proceed, or not, after security warning alert presence. Note: +MEMGS parameters are saved after the power cycle.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-243.html">PAGE 243</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-91: +MEMGS Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> Description <security_ssl_ sending> Allows the user to enable or disable transfer data through ssl protocol which provides a practical, application-layer, widely applicable connection oriented mechanism for internet client/server communications security. The default value is 1 - No.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-244.html">PAGE 244</a></h6> <p>Email Command Type Execute Syntax AT+MEMDE Response/Action OK Or: +CME ERROR: <err> Remarks Execute command acts as set command with notification equals to `0`. The following table shows the +MEMDE parameters. Table 3-92: +MEMDE Parameters <Parameter> Description <notification> 0 - Unsolicited report for receiving status is disabled. 1 - Unsolicited report for receiving status is enabled. The default value is 0. <status> Integer value. Notification for the receiving status. See Table 3-94.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-245.html">PAGE 245</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MEMSE, Send Email Message This AT command is used to connect to mail server in order to Send the email massages to the G24 memory. In case the <notification> parameter is set to ON, the unsolicited message will be printed to the TE with connection status.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-246.html">PAGE 246</a></h6> <p>Email Example: AT+MEMSE=113 OK NO CARRIER // GPRS connection is closed at the end of process AT+MEMSE=113,1 +MEMSE: 32 +MEMSE: 34 +MEMSE: 35 +MEMSE: 37 +MEMSE: 38 +MEMSE: 31 +MEMSE: 31 +MEMSE: 43 +MEMSE: 31 +MEMSE: 44 +MEMSE: 49 +MEMSE: 33 OK NO CARRIER Table 3-94: Send/Receive Status <status> Description Value 3-158 <status> Description Value 0 POP3 account receiving started 36 Connection to mail server failed 1 POP3 account receiving finished 37 SMTP Logging in started 2 Connect to mail se</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-247.html">PAGE 247</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-94: Send/Receive Status (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-248.html">PAGE 248</a></h6> <p>Email +MEML, List Email Messages This AT command is used to display a list of all Email messages from chosen folder. The command returns a series of responses, one per message, and each containing the message information. Command Type Set Syntax AT+MEML=<folder_id> Response/Action Remarks [+MEML: <message_id>, <status>,<from>,<to>,<cc >,<bcc>,<subject>,<date> >,<priority>,<attachments >,<email_size> ...</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-249.html">PAGE 249</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-95: +MEML Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> <status> Description Status of the message (can be a combination of statuses). <status> (decimal) Description 0 READ 1 SENT 2 UN-(read/sent) 4 Reserved 8 Reserved 16 Reserved 32 Reserved 64 Reserved 128 Reserved Example: 0 = READ 1 = SENT 2 = UN-READ 3 = UN-SENT <from> Original message address. <to> Addresses of intended recipients of current email message.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-250.html">PAGE 250</a></h6> <p>Email Table 3-95: +MEML Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> <attachments> Description Indication of attachments files in the current message. <attachments> Description value <email_size> 0 Email message without attachments. 1 Email message with attachments. The bite size of the current email message. Example: AT+MEML=0 +MEML:115,0,"Renata@motorola.com","renata7@bezeqint.net,aaaaaaaaa01@hotmail.com,aaaaaaaaa0 2@hotmail.com","bbbbbbbb01@hotmail.com,bbbbbbbb02@hotmail.com,bbbbbbbb03@hotmail.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-251.html">PAGE 251</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MEMR, Read Email Message This AT command is used to display an email message chosen by its <message_id>. <status> of each message is changed to read status after the message is read for the first time. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action AT+MEMR=<message_id> +MEMR:<status>,<priority ><from>,<to>,<cc>,<bcc>,< subject>,<date>,<body>>,< name_of_attachments> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> Remarks The following table shows the +MEMR parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-252.html">PAGE 252</a></h6> <p>Email Table 3-96: +MEMR Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> Description <bcc> Addresses of intended copy recipients of current email message. The maximum length of this parameter is 250 characters. <subject> The subject of the current email messages. The maximum length of this parameter is 128 characters. <date> Information about date and time of message receiving by email server. The date format is: "MM/DD/YY HH:MM: +-Z".</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-253.html">PAGE 253</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MEMD parameters. Table 3-97: +MEMD Parameters <Parameter> Description <delflag> 0 - Delete a single message. The <target> specifies the message id to be deleted (see <message_id>). 1 - Delete all messages in the folder. The <target> specifies the folder from where all messages will be deleted (see <folder_id>). 2 - Delete all the messages in all folders. The <target> field should not be used.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-254.html">PAGE 254</a></h6> <p>Email +MEMW, Write or Update Email Message This AT command is used to write a new email message or update an existing one. The message is saved in memory, and the message ID is displayed to the user. Notes: • • • • • To create a new email message, <message_id> field must not be provided. To update an email message, <message_id> field must be provided. When updating a field, old value of the updated field is deleted. Total body length decreased if Auto-signature text exists.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-255.html">PAGE 255</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Updating email AT+MEMW=1,109,"mike@mail.com" //update an existing email > <CTRL+Z> //body remain the same +MEMW: 109 OK AT+MEMR=109 //read the updated mail, cc: field was added body was //not changed +MEMR: 3,"","joe@mail.com","mike@mail.com","","","01/01/00 04:40 -00","text for body is entered here new line is entered" OK AT+MEMW=0,109,"nir@mail.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-256.html">PAGE 256</a></h6> <p>Email Example AT+MEGA="4252833433" OK AT+MEGA? +MEGA: "4252833433" OK 3-168 AT Commands Reference Manual August 5, 2008</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-257.html">PAGE 257</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Network Network Commands +CSQ, Signal Strength This command displays the received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit error rate <ber> from the G24. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Execute/Read AT+CSQ AT+CSQ? +CSQ: <rssi>,<ber> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> Test AT+CSQ=? +CSQ: (list of supported <rssi>s),(list of supported <ber>s) OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The following table shows the +CSQ parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-258.html">PAGE 258</a></h6> <p>Network +CRLP, Radio Link Protocol This command displays the Radio Link Protocol parameters that are used when non-transparent data calls are originated.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-259.html">PAGE 259</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CREG, Network Registration Status Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+CREG=<n> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err The Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code and the result of the Read operation. Read AT+CREG? +CREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The Read command returns the status of the result code presentation and shows whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the G24.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-260.html">PAGE 260</a></h6> <p>Network Example AT+CREG=? +CREG: (000 - 002) OK AT+CREG? +CREG: 000,001 OK AT+CREG=2 OK AT+CREG? +CREG: 002,001, a065,988b OK AT+CREG=1 OK AT+CREG? +CREG: 001,001 OK AT+CREG=0 OK 3-172 AT Commands Reference Manual August 5, 2008</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-261.html">PAGE 261</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CGREG, GPRS Network Registration Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action AT+CGREG=[<n>] Remarks OK The Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result or: code "+CGREG:" and the result of the +CME ERROR: <err> Read operation.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-262.html">PAGE 262</a></h6> <p>Network Example AT+CGREG=? +CGREG: (000-002) OK AT+CGREG=2 OK AT+CGREG? +CGREG: 002,001,2648,988b OK AT+CGREG=1 OK AT+CGREG? +CGREG: 001,001 OK AT+CGREG=0 OK //Example for unsolicited reports: AT+CGREG=1 OK AT+CGATT=0 OK +CGREG: 000 AT+CGATT=1 OK +CGREG: 002 +CGREG: 001 //Remove GPRS enabled SIM +CGREG: 000 //Insert GPRS enabled SIM +CGREG: 002 +CGREG: 001 +COPS, Operator Selection This command enables accessories to access the network registration information, and the selection and registration of the GS</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-263.html">PAGE 263</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Set Syntax AT+COPS=[<mo de>[,<format> [,<oper>]]] Response/Action Remarks OK The Set command can force an attempt to select and register a specific GSM network or: operator. The <mode> selects whether this is +CME ERROR: <err> done automatically by the G24, or whether the selection is forced to an operator <oper> (given in format <format>). If the selected operator is not available, no other operator is selected (except when the <mode> is set to 4).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-264.html">PAGE 264</a></h6> <p>Network The following table shows the +COPS parameters. Table 3-104: +COPS Parameters <Parameter> Description <format> The operator format type: 0 Long alphanumeric 1 Short alphanumeric 2 Numeric The default value is 0. <mode> Determines whether what is displayed is defined by <oper>, or is done automatically by the G24.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-265.html">PAGE 265</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CPOL, Preferred Operators This command is used to edit the PLMN selector lists in the SIM card or active application in the UICC (GSM or USIM). This command writes, reads, and deletes an entry in the SIM/USIM list of preferred PLMNs, previously selected by the command +CPLS. If no list has been previously selected, the EFPLMNwAcT - user controlled PLMN selector with Access Technology list, is the one accessed by default.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-266.html">PAGE 266</a></h6> <p>Network Note 1: • If <index> is given but <oper> is left out, entry is deleted. • If <oper> is given but <index> is left out, <oper> is put in the next free location. • If only <format> is given, the format of the <oper> in the read command is changed. Note 2: • User is prevented from editing index No. 0. This index is reserved for the HPLMN record and can not be modified.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-267.html">PAGE 267</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CPLS, Selection of Preferred PLMN List. This AT command is used to select one Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) selector with Access Technology list in the SIM card or active application in the UICC (GSM or USIM), that is used by +CPOL AT command. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+CPLS=<list> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The set command is used to select PLMN list in the SIM/USIM. It is used by the +CPOL AT command.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-268.html">PAGE 268</a></h6> <p>Network +CPLS:(0,1,2) OK AT+CPLS=1 OK AT+CPLS? +CPLS: 1,"OPLMNwACT" OK +MFS, Motorola Frequency of Search This command is used to determine how long the G24 waits before attempting to reregister after a registration attempt has failed and the G24 is not registered. The available settings are Slow Search, Medium Search, Fast Search or Continuous Search. See Table 3-107, “+MFS Parameters”, for the minimum interval lengths for every frequency of search.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-269.html">PAGE 269</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Read +MFS? +MFS: <freq>,<mode> The Read command returns the current settings for values of <freq> and OK <mode>. or: +CME ERROR: <err> Test +MFS=? +MFS: (List of The Test command returns the possible supported <freq>,(List <freq> and <mode> values. of supported <mode>s) OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The following table shows the +MFS parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-270.html">PAGE 270</a></h6> <p>Network +MFS: 2,1 //POWER CYCLE phone AT+MFS? +MFS: 2,1 OK AT+MFS=0 OK AT+MFS? +MFS: 0,1 OK //Previous values restored after power up. +MCELL, Motorola Cell Description This command displays information about the Cellular Network. The information is divided throughout 20 screens, each of them with different parameters data.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-271.html">PAGE 271</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MCELL parameters. Table 3-108: +MCELL Parameters <Parameter> Description <mode> 0 <screen_num> The requested screen number - An integer number.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-272.html">PAGE 272</a></h6> <p>Network Table 3-109: Title to Screen Mapping (Cont.) <screen title> Description <screen num> Hopping Info Dedicated/TBF modes; Hopping Information screen. 14 PDP Context x PDP Context Information screen x - index cell. 15-18 Paging Params Idle/Packet Idle mode; Serving Cell Paging parameters. 19 SysInfos Idle/Packet Idle mode; Optional SYSINFO.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-273.html">PAGE 273</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference trc* thp* rb**** des* dor* er**** sdu**** tsfd**** ulmax ** gr ** dlmax**** gr**** OK The following tables describe the different screens.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-274.html">PAGE 274</a></h6> <p>Network Table 3-113: TBF Uplink Data Transfer Screen B C 0 0 6 7 B C 0 0 6 7 u l : p * * t * * * * a r * l * * * * / * * * r * * * * / * * * 3-186 1 5 - 0 6 7 B Channel Type (PD)TCH ARFCN BSIC RxLev Sync Status GPRS cell indicator Cell ID G P i d 1 8 6 4 2 Beacon carrier (P)BCCH ARFCN s * * * * * * * * ul: TxPower w s * * * * Coding Scheme RFU * * t * * * * l Rpeated LLC frames / Total LLC Frames Average th</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-275.html">PAGE 275</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-114: TBF Downlink Data Transfer Screen B C 0 0 6 7 B C 0 0 6 7 d l : * * * * a r * l * * * * / * * * r * * * * / * * * t 1 5 - 0 6 9 B Channel Type (PD)TCH ARFCN BSIC (P)BCCH ARFCN RxLev Sync Status GPRS cell indicator Cell ID G P i d 1 8 6 4 2 Beacon carrier s * * * * * * * * dl: w s * * * * Coding Scheme * * t * * * * l Rpeated LLC frames / Total LLC Frames Average throu</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-276.html">PAGE 276</a></h6> <p>Network Table 3-117: Reselection Screen 0 0 6 7 + 3 9 * * * p c * + 3 9 (P)BCCH ARFCN C1 C31 Priority Class C2/C32 0 1 1 9 + 3 2 * * * p c * + 3 2 Cell (P)BCCH ARFCN Cell C1 Cell C31 Cell Priority Class Cell C2/C32 0 1 0 1 * * * * * * p c * * * * Cell (P)BCCH ARFCN Cell C1 Cell C31 Cell Priority Class Cell C2/C32 0 0 7 9 * * * * * * p c * * * * Cell (P)BCCH ARFCN Cell C1 Cell C31 Cell Priority Class Cell C2/C32 0 1 2 4 *</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-277.html">PAGE 277</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-120: I-PI Serving Cell Paging Parameters Screen B C 0 0 6 7 B C 0 0 6 7 b s p a 7 b s p g # # # b s p b * p c h r * s * 1 5 - 0 6 7 B Channel Type (PD)BCCH ARFCN G P i d 1 8 6 4 2 Beacon carrier s a g 1 c c c h g 0 BS_PA_MFRMS b s p a g * * C split_pg_cycle n b p * p r p c l * * * r p * * BS_PBCCH_ BLOCKS Timeslot BSIC RxLev (P)BCCH ARFCN GPRS cell indicator BS_AG_BLK_R</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-278.html">PAGE 278</a></h6> <p>Network The following table provides definitions for EFEM-related terms. Table 3-123: EFEM Parameters Abbreviation/Term 3-190 Description 2bis Binary information telling whether the ext_ind bit in the SysInfo 2 message (sent by the serving cell in idle mode) indicates that the network is sending a 2bis message. 2ter Binary information telling whether the 2TI bit in the SysInfo 3 message (sent by the serving cell) indicates that the network is sending a 2ter message.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-279.html">PAGE 279</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-123: EFEM Parameters (Cont.) Abbreviation/Term August 5, 2008 Description Cell ID Cell Identity parameter, from System Info 3. CellResHys Cell reselect hysteresis, used to compute C2, in Bm (0 to 14 dBm). It is broadcast on System Info 3. Cell Resel. Offset Cell Reselect Offset, in dBm (between 0 and 63 dBm). It is broadcast on System Info 3 rest octets. Channel type Type of channel used in the current operating mode.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-280.html">PAGE 280</a></h6> <p>Network Table 3-123: EFEM Parameters (Cont.) Abbreviation/Term Description Max bit rate dl Max bit rate for Downlink in KPBS. Max bit rate ul Max bit rate for Uplink in KPBS. MCC Mobile Country Code. MNC Mobile Network Code. MaxTxPWR The maximum power (sent on System Info 3 and PSI 3) that the phone is allowed to transmit while sending channel request messages.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-281.html">PAGE 281</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-123: EFEM Parameters (Cont.) Abbreviation/Term August 5, 2008 Description split_pg_cycle Number of paging blocks to read on the serving cell in each row of 64 multiframes (on CCCH or PCCCH). The value can range from 0 to 352. Sync status Provides information about the reporting status of the adjacent cell. Depending on the status, certain adjacent cell parameters are invalid. T3212 MM location area update timer.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-282.html">PAGE 282</a></h6> <p>Network + MGAUTH, Enable Authentication Protocol Setting (CHAP/PAP) This command enables Authentication Protocol setting (CHAP/PAP) for a PPP link. This command is a basic command. In MUX mode, this AT command is allowed on DLC2 only. Note: Once the Authentication Protocol was set, the setting will be affective for internal and external connections.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-283.html">PAGE 283</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference AT+ MGAUTH =1 OK // set Authentication protocol as CHAP AT+ MGAUTH? + MGAUTH: 1 // Authentication protocol is CHAP +MCI, Motorola Cell Information This command returns neighbor cell information.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-284.html">PAGE 284</a></h6> <p>Network Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Read AT+MCI? +MCI: <Filter>,[<bitmask>] OK The Read command returns the current set <Filter> and <bitmask> values. Test AT+MCI=? +MCI: (List of supported <Filter>s), (Range of supported <bitmask>s) OK The Test command returns the ranges of <Filter>'s supported values and <bitmask> supported values. The following table shows the +MCI parameters. Table 3-125: +MCI Parameters <Parameter> Description <Filter> The requested GSM band's ARFCNs.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-285.html">PAGE 285</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+MCI // Get the current serving and neighbour's info. +MCI: 74,17,-68,642,52,-77,77,53,-90,76,11,-93,81,,-94,66,57,-96 OK AT+MCI=2 // Get serving cell info and GSM 900 neighbour's only info. +MCI: 74,17,-68,77,53,-90,76,11,-93,81,,-94,66,57,-96 OK AT+MCI=6 // Get serving cell info and GSM 1800 only neighbour's // only info. +MCI: 74,17,-68,642,52,-77 OK AT+MCI=? // Get <Filter> and <enable TA> supported values.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-286.html">PAGE 286</a></h6> <p>Network Default value: On first power up, the jamming detector is not active (i.e. the default value for <mjdc_mode> is "0"). Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+MJDC=<mjdc_ mode > OK +MJDC:<jamming_det ection> Or: +CME ERROR: <err> The set command configures the jamming mode. NOTE: <jamming_detection> will be displayed only when jamming detector is enabled (i.e. <mjdc_mode>=1).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-287.html">PAGE 287</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference AT+MJDC? +MJDC: 0 OK // jamming detector is disable AT+MJDC=? +MJDC: (0,1) OK // ranges of <mjdc_mode>s. AT+MJDC = 1 +MJDC:0 OK // enable the jamming detector // no jamming is currently detected. // Use a jamming device to jam ME's bends.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-288.html">PAGE 288</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information Hardware Information Hardware Information Commands +CBC, Battery Charger Connection This command enables a user to query the battery power level. Command Type Read Syntax Response/Action +CBC +CBC:<bcs>,<bcl> The following table shows the +CBC parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-289.html">PAGE 289</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference OK Note: The battery level is an average value, which updated once in 0.5 minute max. Each battery level update causes change of one 5 stages sequentaly. It means that If the VCC level has changed, for example, from 3.5V to 4.0V, the reports will be as following. All values are on the 70 pin connector. Preciseness is (+/-) 50mV. AT+CBC +CBC: 0,20 OK AT+CBC +CBC: 0,60 OK AT+CBC +CBC: 0,90 OK //This example shows 0 (battery powered) with 20% power.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-290.html">PAGE 290</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information The following table shows the +CBAUD parameters. Table 3-128: +CBAUD Parameters <Parameter> <n> <rate> Description 0 Auto baud rate 1 600 2 1200 3 2400 4 4800 5 9600 6 19200 7 38400 8 57600 9 Auto baud rate 10 115200 11 300 12 230400 13 460800 The default value is 9.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-291.html">PAGE 291</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Using AT+IPR=<rate> with a <rate> value other than 9 and 0 disables the auto baud rate detection feature. The entered baud rate is stored in the G24 and is restored after power up. The G24 supports up to 57600 auto baud. Notes:+IPR is similar to +CBAUD, but with the ability to save. ATZ command sets the G24 to default baud rate - Auto baud rate, and the saved baud rate is restored only after power-up.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-292.html">PAGE 292</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information +GCAP, Request Overall Capabilities This command indicates the major capability areas of the G24. The support of different areas is presented in the response of the +GCAP command. Each area may be presented by the selection command name of a specific capability area. The G24 supports only FCLASS - fax support. Command Type Execute Syntax AT+GCAP Response/Action GCAP: <list of supported features><CR><LF> OK // at the end of the list.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-293.html">PAGE 293</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MTCTS, CTS Line Test Command This command sets the CTS pin of the RS232 to active high, waits one second and then returns the CTS to active low. Command Type Execute Syntax AT+MTCTS Response/Action OK Example AT+MTCTS OK &K, RTS/CTS Flow Control This command configures the flow control. The RTS (Request To Send) is an input line. The RTS signal is received from the terminal and a low condition indicates that the G24 can send more data.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-294.html">PAGE 294</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information The following table shows the &K parameters. Table 3-131: &K Parameters <Parameter> <param> Description 0 Disable all terminal/G24 flow control 3 Enable CTS/RTS terminal/G24 flow control 4 Enable Xon/Xoff terminal/G24 flow control 5 Enable Xon/Xoff terminal/G24 flow control 6 Enable CTS/RTS terminal/G24 flow control The default value is 3.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-295.html">PAGE 295</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference When AT&C is set to 0, the DCD signal is always ON. When AT&C is set to 1, the DCD is activated in online mode. When AT&C is set to 2, the DCD is activated only when the PDP context is achieved (temporary IP address is received). Command Type Syntax Response/Action Set AT&C<param> OK Read AT&C? &C:<param> Test AT&C=? &C:(list of supported <param>s) The following table shows the &C parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-296.html">PAGE 296</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information &D, Circuit 108 Behavior This command determines how the G24 responds when the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) status is changed from ON to OFF during the online data state. The DTR is an input line that indicates that the terminal is ready. The DTR line must be active (low) in order for the G24 to recognize the terminal. This signal is raised by the terminal when a process activates the serial port.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-297.html">PAGE 297</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MCWAKE, GPRS Coverage This command tells the G24 whether to report on the status of the GPRS/GSM coverage. There are three possibilities: • Do not report the status of the GPRS/GSM coverage. • Report only when the GPRS/GSM coverage goes off. • Report only when the GPRS/GSM coverage goes on.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-298.html">PAGE 298</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information +MGGIND, GSM/GPRS Service Indicator This command configures the service indicator line of pin 49 of the 70 pin connector to be GPRS or GSM registration indicator. The IO line (pin 49) function according to the current registration state (in service or not) of the specific service indicator configuration. Note: IO line (pin 49) out come depends on +MCWAKE configuration.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-299.html">PAGE 299</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CFUN, Shut Down Phone Functionality This command shuts down the phone functionality of smart phones and PDAs with phone capabilities in order to prevent interference from a nearby environment. This enables other functionality to continue to be used in environments where phone use is either impractical or not permitted. For example, on airplanes the use of cellular phones is forbidden during the entire flight, but the use of computers is allowed during much of the flight.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-300.html">PAGE 300</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information AT+CFUN? +CFUN: 4 Power cycling… AT+CFUN? +CFUN: 4 Power cut … AT+CFUN? // Phone transmit and receive RF circuits (default value of first parameter after power cut is '0') +CFUN: 0 AT+CFUN=1 OK // Enable phone transmit and receive RF circuits through '1' AT+CFUN? +CFUN: 1 Power cycling… AT+CFUN? +CFUN: 1 Power cut … AT+CFUN? +CFUN: 0 +ICF, DTE-DCE Character Framing This command determines the local serial port start/stop (asynchronous) character framing used by the DCE when accept</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-301.html">PAGE 301</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +ICF parameters. Table 3-137: +ICF Parameters <Parameter> Description <format> Determines the number of bits in the data bits, the presence (or absence) of a parity bit, and the number of stop bits in the start/stop frame.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-302.html">PAGE 302</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information The following table shows the ATS97 parameters. Table 3-138: ATS97 Parameters <Parameter> <info> Description 000 001 The antenna is not connected The antenna is connected Example // Connect the antenna ATS97? 001 ATS97 OK ATS97=? ERROR // Disconnect the antenna ATS97? 000 +MRST, Perform Hard Reset The +MRST command enables customer software to perform a hard reset to the G24 unit. This command provides a software simulation for pressing the power-off button.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-303.html">PAGE 303</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Operation of this command is flex dependant. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+TWUS=<bit mask> OK or: ERROR Set wakeup reason. Read AT+TWUS? +TWUS: <bitmask> or: ERROR Read current setting. The following table shows the +TWUS parameters. Table 3-139: +TWUS Parameters <bitmask> Description 00000000 Disabled - No notifications provided for any events. 00000001 Loss of GSM Network. 00000002 Network Change. 00000004 Incoming Call.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-304.html">PAGE 304</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information +TWUR, Wakeup Reason Request This command is used to query the wakeup reason. Multiple wakeup reasons can be returned in the <bitmask>. The reason(s) for wakeup will be cleared once the AT+TWUR read command is issued, or if the G24 is powered off. The Wakeup Out line will be set to high once the AT+TWUR read command is issued. Operation of this command is flex dependant. Command Type Read Syntax AT+TWUR? Response/Action +TWUR:<bitmask> OK Remarks Query Wakeup reason.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-305.html">PAGE 305</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Operation of this command is flex dependent. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+TASW=<ant> OK or: ERROR Set active antenna. Read AT+TASW? +TASW:<ant> or: ERROR Read the antenna selection. Test AT+TASW=? +TASW: (Supported <ant>s) or: ERROR Supported antennas. The following table shows the +TASW parameters. Table 3-140: +TASW Parameters <Parameter> <ant> Description 1 2 Primary antenna (default value). Secondary antenna.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-306.html">PAGE 306</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information Operation of this command is flex dependent. Command Type Read Syntax AT+TADIAG? Response/Action Remarks +TADIAG: <RF1_value>,<RF2_value> OK or: +CME ERROR <error> The following table shows the +TADIAG parameters. Table 3-141: +TADIAG Parameters <Parameter> Description <RF1_value> 0-255 ADC value reading of primary antenna. <RF2_value> 0-255 ADC value reading of secondary antenna.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-307.html">PAGE 307</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference In case that second UART is open for full functionality, the call control - voice, FAX, CSD, GPRS call, SMS processing and TCP/UDP operation is managed by Software application on each UART separately without any interaction. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +MPSU=<activity> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The set command defines the functionality of the second UART. The new AT command will affect the new flex byte and restart G24 module.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-308.html">PAGE 308</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information Example AT+MPSU? +MPSU: 0 OK AT+MPSU=? +MPSU: (0-2) OK AT+MPSU=2 OK /* reset and after it UART2 is open for full functionality */ +MIOC, Motorola I/O Configure This command defines the G24 8 GPIO pins data value. The feature is flex enabled or disabled. This command is a basic command. The feature is active by default, however, changing the FLEX can eliminate it. Note: Support of the GPIO pins comes instead of supporting the keypad of the Evaluation board.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-309.html">PAGE 309</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MIOC parameters. Table 3-143: +MIOC Parameters August 5, 2008 <Parameter> Description <pin selection> Selected pins for the action invoked. This is a binary vector in which each bit points to pin number. Vector size is 8. 0 Not selected 1 Selected pin (default) <data vector> This is a binary vector in which each bit show the physical value of pin. Data vector size is 8. 0 Physical low signal. 1 Physical high signal (default).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-310.html">PAGE 310</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information Example AT+MIOC=? +MIOC: (00000000-11111111),(00000000-11111111) OK Light control example: Client has an electronic controlled light switch. The intent is to connect this switch to the g24 (IO pin 5 - for example) and control the light by setting the logical values of pin 5. Example of code is as follows: AT+MIOD=00010000,0 // Set IO pin #5 to be output. OK AT+MIOD? // (Optional) Read the IO pin definitions to confirm correct settings.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-311.html">PAGE 311</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Data sending (vector example): Client has a data bus with 8 bits and plans to implement some protocol over it. In this example 4 pins (pins 1-4) are used as an output and 4 pins (5-8) are used as input. Example of code is as follows: AT+MIOD=00001111,0 // Set IO pins 1-4 to be output level mode. OK AT+MIOD=11110000,1 // Set IO pins 5-8 to be input level mode. OK // Unnecessary, because by default all pins are input.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-312.html">PAGE 312</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information +MIOD, Motorola I/O Define This command defines the G24 8 GPIO pins configuration. The feature is flex enabled or disabled. This command is a basic command. The feature is active by default, however, changing the FLEX can eliminate it. Note: When using the GPIO lines feature, lines should not be connected directly to ground, a resistor must be used. This is applicable when changing an I/O from input to output.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-313.html">PAGE 313</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MIOD parameters. Table 3-144: +MIOD Parameters <Parameter> Description <pin selection> Selected pins for the action invoked. This is a binary vector in which each bit points to pin number. Vector size is 8. 0 Not selected 1 Selected pin (default) <mode> GPIO pin operation mode. 0 Output (level only) 1 Input (level mode) <mode vector> This is a binary vector in which each bit shows the operation mode of pin. Data vector size is 8.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-314.html">PAGE 314</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information Example +MIOD: (00000000-11111111),(0,1),( 00000000-11111111) AT+MIOD=00010000,0 // Set IO pin #5 to be output. OK AT+MIOD? +MIOD: 111011111 // Pins 1-4 and 6-8 are input. Pin 5 is output. OK AT+MIOD=00001111,0 // Set IO pins 1-4 to be output level mode. OK AT+MIOD=11110000,1 // Set IO pins 5-8 to be input level mode.(Default settings). OK AT+MIOD? +MIOD: 11110000 // Pins 1-4 output pins, 5-8 input pins.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-315.html">PAGE 315</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Read Syntax AT+MMAD? Response/Action List of converters and their monitoring setup values: Remarks Read the setting of the A/D converters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-316.html">PAGE 316</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information Command Type Syntax Response/Action Unsolicited AT+MMAD=<Conver ter_number> Messages Case: *. Average calculation is not active : *. Average calculation is active: +MMAD: <Converter_number>, <Converted_Value> OK Remarks If <Report> value is - 3, the report will be generated according to report interval value. If <Report interval> value was not set, there will be no messages but you can ask for solicited message.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-317.html">PAGE 317</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-146: +MMAD Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> August 5, 2008 Description Range/Remark <Average_calc _duration> 1-255 For how long the average calculation will be active. 1- Default value if 0 - Not active. average is active. 255 - Endless. While not active = 0. 1...254 - minutes. <Report_interv al> 0-255 Time interval between two average reports (seconds). <Average> Average calculation result. AT Commands Reference Manual 0 - Default value.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-318.html">PAGE 318</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information Table 3-147: A/D Value to Temperature Conversion 3-230 Temperature (°C) AD Valuedecimal (8 bit) Temperature (°C) AD Valuedecimal (8 bit) Temperature (°C) AD Valuedecimal (8 bit) -30 229 4 114 38 43 -29 226 5 111 39 41 -28 223 6 108 40 40 -27 219 7 105 41 39 -26 216 8 102 42 38 -25 213 9 100 43 37 -24 210 10 97 44 36 -23 206 11 94 45 34 -22 203 12 92 46 33 -21 199 13 89 47 32 -20 196 14 87 48 31 -19 192 15 84</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-319.html">PAGE 319</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Figure 3-2: Temperature Vs. A/D Value Temperature Conversion Function: y = -0.000000001274363x 5 + 0.000000891590586x 4 - 0.000243313821866x 3 + 0.03289363197371x 2 − 2.56083979143995x + 103.29970685293 Legend: x = A/D value y = Temperature Example AT+MMAD =1 +MMAD:1,175 OK // Read A2D1 values with analog input of 1.75V. AT+MMAD=2,1,15 // Read A2D2 converted value every 15 seconds and send unsolicited report to the DTE.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-320.html">PAGE 320</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information // report originated by G24 // Converter num=1, report=3, rate=5*100ms, low,high, N_samples, duration=5 AT+MMAD =1,3,5, , ,16,5,30 OK +MMAD:1,175 +MMAD:1,140 ….. +MMAD:1,160 AT+MMAD =1,0,5, , ,16,5,0 OK AT+MMAD=1 Ok //First report //Second report //Last Avr report // Activate Average calculation during 5 minutes, rate=5.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-321.html">PAGE 321</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MPCMC, Continuous PCM Clock This command defines whether the PCM clock is generated continuously or not, when phone is in digital audio mode (configured by AT+MADIGITAL command). The change takes effect after the next audio operation. Note: User is advised not to enable sleep mode feature if he wants to use continuous PCM clock feature. Otherwise PCM clock will not work correctly while module is in deep sleep mode.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-322.html">PAGE 322</a></h6> <p>Hardware Information +MVREF, Motorola Voltage Reference This command defines the Vref regulator's configuration. Pin 27 is used as indicator signal that reflects the configuration of Vref regulator. This command is a basic command. The command is also sensitive to ATS24 command. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +MVREF=<control> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The Set command is used for setting the behavior of Vref regulator.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-323.html">PAGE 323</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference OK AT+MVREF=2 mode. OK ATS24=2 OK ATS24=0 OK August 5, 2008 //The user set STANDBY and the Vref regulator will enter into ON //Vref regulator will enter into Low Power mode. //Vref regulator back into ON mode.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-324.html">PAGE 324</a></h6> <p>Audio Audio Scope The audio control can be Summarized to the following three issues: • Path: Selection of microphone and speaker to be used. • Gain: Control of volume levels for rings, voice, etc. • Algorithm: Activation of audio algorithms (echo cancellation, noise suppression and sidetone). The G24 incorporates two audio modes: 'Basic Audio' and 'Advanced Audio'. Each mode has a different behavior and a set of relevant AT commands.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-325.html">PAGE 325</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-151 shows the differences between Basic and Advanced audio modes in controlling the audio. Table 3-151: Basic and Advanced Audio Modes Comparison Basic Audio Advanced Audio Path Paths are set automatically (upon interrupt). Paths are set manually. All routings are available; any microphone with any speaker for each type of sound (voice, keypad, ring, etc.). Gain There are two types of gains: phone (voice, keypad) and ring.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-326.html">PAGE 326</a></h6> <p>Audio Audio Control of Path, Gain and Algorithms is available by these two different modes' sets of commands. It is advised to select the audio mode according to the application needs, either the 'Basic Audio' set or the 'Advanced Audio'. Basic Audio Setup This mode’s set of commands suits most users. It provides a simple audio control. In this mode the G24 will also adjust the paths automatically upon headset interrupt. The G24 powers up in 'Basic Audio' mode.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-327.html">PAGE 327</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference G24 supports both analog and digital audio. Digital audio is supported in both basic and advanced audio setups. Switching between analog and digital audio modes is done by AT+MADIGITAL command. The default state is analog. Power Up Analog A T+MA D IGITA L=1 A T+MA D IGITA L=0 Digital Figure 3-6: Analog/Digital Switching General Audio Commands The following audio commands can be used in both Basic and Advanced audio modes.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-328.html">PAGE 328</a></h6> <p>Audio The following table shows the +CRSL parameters. Table 3-152: +CRSL Parameters <Parameter> <level> Description 0-7 Ringer sound level (0 is lowest; 7 is default) Example AT+CRSL? +CRSL: 7 OK AT+CRSL=? +CRSL: (0-7) OK AT+CRSL=5 OK +CLVL, Loudspeaker Volume This command sets the volume of the internal loudspeaker (which also affects the key feedback tone) of the G24. Note: The +CLVL command does not control the alert speaker. In this command, the new value remains after power cycle.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-329.html">PAGE 329</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +CLVL parameters. Table 3-153: +CLVL Parameters <Parameter> <level> Description 0-7 Manufacturer-specific volume range. 0 is lowest volume (not mute). The default value is 7. Example AT+CLVL? +CLVL: 7 OK AT+CLVL=? +CLVL: (0-7) OK AT+CLVL=3 OK +CMUT, Mute/Unmute Currently Active Microphone Path This command is used to mute/unmute the currently active microphone path by overriding the current mute state.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-330.html">PAGE 330</a></h6> <p>Audio Example AT+CMUT=? +CMUT:(0-1) OK AT+CMUT? +CMUT: 0 uplink voice is unmuted OK AT+CMUT=1 uplink voice is muted OK AT+CMUT? +CMUT: 1 OK AT+CMUT =2 +CME ERROR: <err> S94, Sidetone Effect This command reduces the microphone audio input that is routed to the selected speaker, so that people speaking will hear themselves talking (The default value of S94 is "1"). The following table explains the use of the ATS94 set.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-331.html">PAGE 331</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the S94 parameters. Table 3-156: S94 Parameters <Parameter> <n> Description 0 Disable sidetone 1 Enable sidetone On power up the sidetone is enabled. Example ATS94=0 OK ATS94=2 +CME ERROR: <err> ATS94? 000 OK //Disable sidetone //Sidetone disabled S96, Echo Canceling This command suppresses a large amount of the output sound picked up by the input device (cancels all echo). S96 value is saved in the Flex.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-332.html">PAGE 332</a></h6> <p>Audio The following table shows the S96 parameters. Table 3-158: S96 Parameters <Parameter> <n> Description 0 1 Disable echo canceling. Disable noise suppression Enable echo canceling. Enable noise suppression Example ATS96=1 OK ATS96=4 +CME ERROR: <err> ATS96? 001 OK //Enable echo canceling //Echo canceling enabled Advanced Audio Setup Commands This group of commands enables accessory devices to control certain audio aspects within the system.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-333.html">PAGE 333</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following diagram shows the audio paths:.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-334.html">PAGE 334</a></h6> <p>Audio The following table shows the +MAPATH parameters. Table 3-159: +MAPATH Parameters <Parameter> Description <direct> 1 2 <accy> Mode in: 1 Mic 2 Headset mic 3 Digital RX (for read command only) Mode out: 1 Speaker 2 Headset speaker 3 Alert speaker, for example, battery low, incoming SMS, power up, and so on 4 Digital TX (for read command only) <features> (1-15) 1 2 4 8 Mode in, field <features> is ignored. Mode out, field <features> is present.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-335.html">PAGE 335</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MAVOL, Volume Setting This command enables you to determine a volume level for a particular feature via a particular accessory. The gain levels are saved in flex. Therefore, upon power up, the path active (mic, speaker and alert speaker) will have these saved gain levels. Note: The SMS MT volume is adjusted using the +MAVOL command with type "ring". The RING value is related to the SMS alert, the MT call, and so on.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-336.html">PAGE 336</a></h6> <p>Audio The following table shows the +MAVOL parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-337.html">PAGE 337</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MAMUT, Input Devices Mute This command controls the muting/unmuting of all input paths (mic, headset mic or digital RX). Upon power up, all the devices are unmuted. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +MAMUT=<accy>, <state> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The Set command mutes/unmutes any input accessory or any combination of them.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-338.html">PAGE 338</a></h6> <p>Audio +MAFEAT, Features Selection This command controls the algorithm features: sidetone, echo cancel and noise suppression. Upon power up, the sidetone is enabled, and echo canceling and noise suppression are disabled. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+MAFEAT=<feature>, <state> OK The Set command enables/disables feature combinations. or: +CME ERROR: <err> Read AT+MAFEAT? +MAFEAT: The Read command returns the features state (enabled/disabled).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-339.html">PAGE 339</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference General Audio Commands +MADIGITAL, Analog/Digital Audio Switching This command switches between analog and digital audio modes. AT+MADIGITAL=1 switches to digital audio mode, and AT+MADIGITAL=0 switches it back to analog mode. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +MADIGITAL= <mode> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> Read +MADIGITAL? +MADIGITAL:<mode> The Read command returns the current audio mode (analog or digital).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-340.html">PAGE 340</a></h6> <p>Audio +CALM, Alert Sound Mode This command handles the selection of the G24's alert sound mode. The value of the command is saved after a power cycle. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +CALM=<mode> OK The Set command sets the alert sound +CME ERROR: <err> mode. Read +CALM? +CALM: <mode> The Read command displays the +CME ERROR: <err> current alert sound mode setting. Test +CALM=? +CALM: (list of The Test command displays the list of supported modes.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-341.html">PAGE 341</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MDMIC, Enable/Disable Microphone Level Setting in Digital Audio Mode This command Enables/Disables the setting of the microphone level in digital audio mode via +MMICG command. Note: Do not change +MDMIC settings during an active voice call. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+MDMIC=<Mode> OK <Mode> is saved after power down.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-342.html">PAGE 342</a></h6> <p>Audio Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Read +MMICG? +MMICG: <gain> The Read command displays the current +CME ERROR: <err> microphone gain. Test +MMICG=? +MMICG (list of The Test command displays the list of supported gain values. supported <gain>s) +CME ERROR: <err> The following table shows the +MMICG parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-343.html">PAGE 343</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Read AT+CRTT? +CRTT: The Read command returns the ring type number. <RingTypeNumber> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> Test AT+CRTT=? +CRTT: (list of The Test command returns the list of supported tone type numbers and supported <RingTypeNumber>s), operations. (list of supported <operation>s) OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The following table shows the +CRTT parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-344.html">PAGE 344</a></h6> <p>Audio Table 3-168: Ring Tone Types Available CRTT=X Ring Tone Style Name CRTT=X Ring Tone Style Name 6 Continental 26 Interlude 7 Classic 27 Notify 8 Attention 28 Provincial 9 Siren 29 Random 10 Start Up 30 Snaggle 11 Start Up 31 Standard 12 Alert 32 Alert Tada 13 Bells 33 Triads 14 Bits & Bytes 34 Up and Down 15 Chimes high 35 Wind Chimes 16 Chimes low 36 Latin Loops 17 Chord high 37 Walkin Around 18 Chord low 38 Acoustica 19 Claps 39 Power Surge</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-345.html">PAGE 345</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +VTD, Tone Duration This command handles the selection of tone duration. An integer <n> defines the length of tones emitted as a result of the +VTS command. This command does not affect the D (dial) command. (Refer to “D, Dial Command”, page 13.) Any value other than zero causes a tone of duration <n> in multiples of 100 msec. In this command, the new value is erased after power down. Note: In GSM, the tone duration value can be modified depending on the specific network.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-346.html">PAGE 346</a></h6> <p>Audio +VTS, Command-Specific Tone Duration This command transmits a string of DTMF tones when a voice call is active. DTMF tones may be used, for example, when announcing the start of a recording period. The duration does not erase the VTD duration (Refer to “+VTD, Tone Duration” on page 3-256). Note: In GSM, the tone duration value can be modified depending on the specific network.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-347.html">PAGE 347</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Access Access Control Commands When the phone or SIM card is locked or blocked, the only accessory operations allowed are those found in the list of Core AT commands (allowed while phone/SIM card is locked), shown in “Core AT Commands” on page 2-9. All other AT commands are not executed, for example, accessing phone book entries. However, the phone is still capable of sending asynchronous message events via AT responses, for example, incoming call notification.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-348.html">PAGE 348</a></h6> <p>Access +CPIN, Enter PIN for Unlocking SIM Card or Enter PUK for Unblocking SIM Card This command locks the SIM card, and therefore is only relevant for phones that use SIM cards. It unlocks the SIM card when the proper SIM PIN is provided and unblocks the SIM card when the proper SIM PUK is provided. The SIM card is unlocked only once the provided pin is verified as the SIM PIN.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-349.html">PAGE 349</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action AT+CPIN=[<puk> or <pin>], [<newpin>] Remarks OK The Set command sends the password to the G24 that is necessary before it can be or: operated (SIM PIN or SIM PUK). If there +CME ERROR: <err> is no PIN request pending, no action is taken towards the G24, and an error message, +CME ERROR, is returned to the terminal.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-350.html">PAGE 350</a></h6> <p>Example AT+CPIN=? OK AT+CLCK="SC",1,"<correct PIN>"//Not case-sensitive OK The facility is enabled by the +CLCK command (Refer to “+CLCK, Facility Lock” on page 3-265) AT+CPIN? +CPIN: SIM PIN OK AT+CPIN="<correct PIN>" OK AT+CPIN? +CPIN: READY OK The status of the SIM is still enabled, but the PIN is READY for this session. The SIM is enabled per session. After power-up SIM must be unlocked again by using the +CLCK command.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-351.html">PAGE 351</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +EPIN, Enter SIM PIN2 to Verify PIN2 Indicator This AT command will be used to verify the PIN2 when the proper SIM PIN2 password has been provided. The code presented by the ME PIN2 password will be compared with the relevant one stored in the SIM. The execution of this command is possible only if the SIM is in READY state or waiting for PIN2 state.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-352.html">PAGE 352</a></h6> <p>Access +TPIN, Query Number of Remaining SIM PIN/PUK Entering Attempts This command returns the number of remaining attempts of entering the PIN and PUK for the SIM card in use. The command returns the number of remaining attempts for PIN1 (CHV1), PIN2 (CHV2), PUK1 (unblock CHV1) and PUK2 (unblock CHV2). Number of available attempts is provider dependant. Typically it is 3 attempts for PIN, 10 attempts for PUK. This command will return error if SIM is not inserted.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-353.html">PAGE 353</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CPWD, Change Password This command sets a new password for the facility lock. The password can only be changed once the required facility is enabled by the +CLCK command. (Refer to “+CLCK, Facility Lock” on page 3-265). A password can be changed only if the provided password <oldpwd> has been verified. The entered password <newpwd> must also comply to the password rules. The facility value <fac> is not case-sensitive. In the password value, letters are not allowed.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-354.html">PAGE 354</a></h6> <p>Access Example AT+CPWD =? +CPWD: ("SC",8),("AO",8),("OI",8),("OX",8),("AI",8),("IR",8),("AB",8),("AG",8), ("AC",8),("P2",8) OK AT+CPWD? +CME ERROR: operation not supported AT+CLCK: "sc",1,"current pin password" AT+CPWD="sc","incorrect old password","new password" +CME ERROR: incorrect password AT+CLCK="sc",2 +CLCK: 0 OK AT+CPWD="sc","old password","new password" +CME ERROR: operation not allowed AT+CLCK="fd",1,"current pin2 password" AT+CPWD="p2","old password","new password" OK AT+CLCK="ai",2 +CLCK: 0,1 +</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-355.html">PAGE 355</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +CLCK=<fac>,<mode> [,<passwd> [,<classx>]] For <fac> where The Set command performs the specified <mode> action on the <class> is irrelevant specified <fac>.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-356.html">PAGE 356</a></h6> <p>Access Table 3-176: +CLCK Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> Description <class> Sum of integers, each representing a class of information <class>. Only applies to call barring related facilities. 1 Voice (telephony) 2 Data (refers to all bearer services) 4 Fax (facsimile services) 8 SMS (Short Message Services) The default value is 7.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-357.html">PAGE 357</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference OK (Voice and data international calls barred, fax and SMS not barred.) AT+CLCK="OI",2 +CLCK: 1,1 +CLCK: 1,2 +CLCK: 0,4 +CLCK: 0,8 OK +EMPC, Unlocking or Locking Subsidy Code The command is handling only in case of "Lock On PLMN Of First Inserted SIM" Subsidy Lock type. This command unlocks or resets the first PLMN of the inserted SIM. Therefore, the command is a "none basic" and will not work if SIM card is not present or if SIM card is not in READY state.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-358.html">PAGE 358</a></h6> <p>Access The following table shows the +EMPC parameters. Table 3-177: +EMPC Parameters <Parameter> Description <pin> Subsidy Lock pin code. <action> 0 1 Unlock subsidy Reset subsidy <unlock> 0 1 2 3 Correct pin code is entered Wrong pin code is entered Wait No meaning <reset> 0 1 2 No subsidy lock Subsidy lock / Reset not allowed Subsidy unlock / Reset allowed Example AT+EMPC? +EMPC:3,0 OK The status of phone is: the subsidy lock is not active.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-359.html">PAGE 359</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference AT+EMPC="<wrong pin>",0 +EMPC:2,1 OK The phone moves to Penalty state. AT+COPS? +CME ERROR: Phone is in penalty state. In case of penalty state, after 5 min if user types a correct pin, the phone will unlock, otherwise the phone will be transited to a lock state.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-360.html">PAGE 360</a></h6> <p>Firmware Update Over the Air (FOTA) The following paragraphs describe the use of AT commands for updating the G24 firmware over the air. Note: FOTA is enabled in modules with SW version G24_G_0C.11.B2R or later, when web session is well configured by +MFOTAWSCFG command, in accordance with your carrier required settings, to allow data connection. The update process is done by communication between the G24 and the versions server.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-361.html">PAGE 361</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Read AT+MFOTAWSCFG? +MFOTAWSCFG: <SERVICE_TYPE>, <PORT>, <GPRS APN> [,[GPRS USER NAME] [,[PROXY]]] OK The read command returns the current setting. Test AT+MFOTAWSCFG =? +MFOTAWSCFG:(list of supported <Service_type>), <port range> OK Test command returns the supported service-types and the port-range. The following table shows the +MFOTAWSCFG parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-362.html">PAGE 362</a></h6> <p>Firmware Update Over the Air (FOTA) OK AT+MFOTAWSCFG? +MFOTAWSCFG:(1-6),(0-65535) // test command OK AT+MFOTAWSCFG = 5 , 8080,"wap.orange.co.il","","","" OK // clear the optional parameters AT+MFOTAWSCFG? +MFOTAWSCFG: 5 , 8080,"wap.orange.co.il" // optional parameters cleared OK AT+MFOTAWSCFG = 5 , 8080,"wap.orange.co.il",,, "192.118.11.55" OK // set proxy ip-adress AT+MFOTAWSCFG? +MFOTAWSCFG: 5 , 8080,"wap.orange.co.il",,, "192.118.11.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-363.html">PAGE 363</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Read Syntax Response/Action AT+MFOTACNFG? +MFOTACNFG: Remarks Provide FOTA session state. <Automatic DM session> Test AT+MFOTACNFG =? +MFOTACNFG : list of <Automatic_DM_Mode> The following table shows the +MFOTACNFG parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-364.html">PAGE 364</a></h6> <p>Firmware Update Over the Air (FOTA) If case that the user missed the last request indication, he can use this command to show the last request, and respond accordingly. See "Execute" command Type on table below. This command is a basic command. In MUX mode, this AT command is allowed on DLC2 only. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Unsolicited Report +MFOTAREQ: <FOTA-Operation> Execute AT+MFOTAREQ Remarks +MFOTAREQ: <FOTA-Operation> The following table shows the +MFOTAREQ parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-365.html">PAGE 365</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference In MUX mode, this AT command is allowed on DLC2 only. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Set AT+ MFOTARSP = <action> <OK> or: +CME ERROR: Test AT+ MFOTARSP=? + MFOTARSP: (list of < action>s) Remarks The following table shows the +MFOTARSP parameters. Table 3-181: +MFOTARSP Parameters <Parameter> <action> Description 0 - start 1 - reject 2- one hour postpone Remarks 2 - relevant for upgrade operation only.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-366.html">PAGE 366</a></h6> <p>Firmware Update Over the Air (FOTA) In MUX mode, this AT command is allowed on DLC2 only. Command Type Execute Syntax Response/Action AT+MFOTAINSTL OK or: +CME ERROR<err> Remarks Install the updated package. +MFOTAABORT, Abort the DM Session This command enables to abort the DM session. As a result, the FOTA activities above DM session (interaction with the server and download) are stopped. This command is a basic command. In MUX mode, this AT command is allowed on DLC2 only.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-367.html">PAGE 367</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference This command is a basic command. In MUX mode, this AT command is allowed on DLC2 only. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+MFOTAIND= <EN-ind> OK or: +CME ERROR:<err> The Set command enables/disables Unsolicited indications. See Table 3-182. Read AT+MFOTAIND? + MFOTAIND: < EN-ind >, OK Returns <EN-ind> value.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-368.html">PAGE 368</a></h6> <p>Firmware Update Over the Air (FOTA) Table 3-182: +MFOTAIND Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> Description <OMA state> 10 14 15 16 17 20 40 60 70 80 90 <FOTA-indications> 4 Warning: Open applications may be closed. 5 DM Session in progress. 6 End call question. 7 DM Session completed. 8 DM session interrupted. 9 Unable to connect to server. 10 Bootstrap completed. 11 Access failed. 12 Download failed. 13,xx Software update xx% completed. 14 Download in progress.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-369.html">PAGE 369</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference In MUX mode, this AT command is allowed on DLC2 only. Command Type Execute August 5, 2008 Syntax AT+MFOTABS Response/Action OK or: +CME ERROR AT Commands Reference Manual Remarks Init OTA bootstrap definition.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-370.html">PAGE 370</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile Modem Configuration and Profile Modem Register Commands The G24 holds certain data items in selected memory space, named Software Registers (S-registers) and Modem Registers. Some of these registers are used as bitmaps, where one register holds more than one data item. All S-registers can be accessed using the S command, described in “S, Bit Map Registers” on page 3-285. Some registers can also be accessed using dedicated commands, detailed below.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-371.html">PAGE 371</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the V parameters. Table 3-184: V Parameters <Parameter> <value> Description 0 Transmits limited headers and trailers, and numeric text. 1 Transmits full headers and trailers, and verbose response text. The default value is 1. Example ATV? V: 1 OK ATV0 0 ATV7 4 ATV1 OK ATV7 ERROR Q, Result Code Suppression This command determines whether to output the result codes.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-372.html">PAGE 372</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile The following table shows the Qn parameters. Table 3-185: Qn Parameters <Parameter> <value> Description 0 Transmit result codes. 1 Suppress result codes. The default value is 0. Example ATQ0 OK ATQ? Q: 0 OK ATQ4 ERROR ATQ1 ATQ4 //No response because result codes are suppressed. //No response because result codes are suppressed. E, Command Echo This command defines whether input characters are echoed to output.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-373.html">PAGE 373</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example ATE? 001 OK X, Result Code Selection and Call Progress Monitoring Control This command defines the CONNECT result code format. It determines whether or not the G24 transmits particular result codes to the user. It also controls whether the G24 verifies the presence of dial tone when it first goes off-hook to begin dialing, and whether the engaged tone (busy signal) detection is enabled.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-374.html">PAGE 374</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile S, Bit Map Registers This command reads/writes values of the S-registers. The G24 supports this command for various S values, according to official specifications (ITU-I, ETSI, or manufacturer specific). Command Type Syntax Response/Action Set ATSn=<value OK The Set command is allowed for read/write S-registers, and not allowed or: for read-only S-registers.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-375.html">PAGE 375</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the different S-registers and their associated values. Sn Description Min Value Max Value Default Value S0 Sets/gets number of rings before auto answer. 0 255 0 S2 Sets/gets escape code character. 0 255 43 S3 Sets/gets carriage return code character. 0 127 13 S4 Sets/gets line feed code character. 0 127 10 S5 Sets/gets command line editing character (backspace).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-376.html">PAGE 376</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile Example ATS36? 005 OK ATS0=3 OK ATS0? 003 OK S2 This command handles the selection of the escape characters, which are stored in S-Register 2, and specifies the escape character used in CSD connections. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action S2=<escape_character> Remarks OK The Set command sets the CSD escape +CME ERROR: <err> character value if all parameters are valid.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-377.html">PAGE 377</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference S12 This command handles the selection of the guard time, which is stored in S-Register 12, and specifies the behavior of escape characters during CSD connection. Note: For a guard time specified by S-Register 12, no character should be entered before or after "+++". The duration between escape codes must be smaller than the guard time.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-378.html">PAGE 378</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile ?, Return the Value of the Last Updated S-register This command displays the most recently updated value stored in an S-register. Command Type Read Syntax Response/Action AT? Remarks The Read command returns the value of the last updated S-register. 000 OK Example AT? 000 OK AT? 003 OK ATS36=5 OK AT? 005 OK &F, Set to Factory Defined Configuration This command restores the factory default configuration profile. The G24 only supports one factory default profile, 0.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-379.html">PAGE 379</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT&F? &F: 0 OK Z, Reset to Default Configuration This command drops the current call, and resets the values to default configuration. Command Type Set Syntax ATZ<value> Response/Action Remarks OK or: +CMS ERROR: <err> Read The Read command for Z is not defined, and therefore is not supported by the G24. The G24 returns an error. Test The Test command for Z is not defined, and therefore is not supported by the G24. The G24 returns an error.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-380.html">PAGE 380</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile sleep mode and signals its readiness for sleep. For this purpose, a set of AT commands and dedicated HW lines are defined. Note: The Sleep mode feature is not relevant when using USB. In USB mode the G24 is always awake. While USB is connected, do not use the following: 1. Sleep mode AT commands. 2. Sleep mode dedicated HW line (wake in/wake out). Sleep Mode AT Commands The following are the Sleep mode AT commands: • ATS24: Activates/deactivates Sleep mode.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-381.html">PAGE 381</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Data transmit TXD Line (pin #21) WAKEUP-IN Line (pin #16) Idle Wakeup 30 ms Figure 3-10: Wakeup-In Line Two modes exist: • Idle Mode: The terminal has no data to send. If the terminal enables sleep mode (using ats24), the G24 activates its Sleep mode module. • Wakeup Mode: The G24 does not enter sleep mode, and the terminal can send data.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-382.html">PAGE 382</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile Two modes exist: • Idle mode: The G24 has no data to send. • Wakeup mode: The G24 has data to send to the terminal. After the G24 changes the line edge to Wakeup mode, there will be a delay (the default is 30 ms) sent by the ats102 command before sending any data to the terminal (using RS232 protocol).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-383.html">PAGE 383</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set ATS24=[<value>] OK The Set command sets the amount of time, in seconds, the G24 should wait before entering Sleep mode. Read ATS24? <value> OK The Read command returns the current value. The following table shows the S24 parameters. Table 3-192: S24 Parameters <Parameter> <value> Description Number of seconds (0 <= n <= 255) 0 Disable Sleep mode >0 Enable Sleep mode The default value is 0.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-384.html">PAGE 384</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set ATS102 = <value> OK The Set command sets the delay before sending data to the terminal, and defines a period between sending the wakeup signal and sending data to the terminal. Read ATS102? <value> OK The Read command returns the current value. The following table shows the S102 parameters. Table 3-193: S102 Parameters <Parameter> <value> Description 0 <= value <= 255 The default value is 30 ms.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-385.html">PAGE 385</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-194: Command parameters <Parameter> <delta> Description Remarks Time interval between one burst of sent/received data to the other before the terminal enters sleep mode. 0 : Wakeup out feature isn't active. (default when +S100 set command is never used) 1 - 255: Time in seconds. This value is saved on power down.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-386.html">PAGE 386</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile The following table shows the +MSCTS parameters. Table 3-195: +MSCTS Parameters <Parameter> <control> Description 0 In Normal Mode: The CTS is used for Flow Control In Sleep mode: The CTS is inactive. 1 Wakeup In line is Active: The CTS is used for Flow Control. Wakeup In line is Inactive: The CTS is inactive. The default value is 0.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-387.html">PAGE 387</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action AT+CMEE=[<n>] Remarks OK The Set command enables or disables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as or: an indication of an error relating to the +CME ERROR: <err> functionality of the G24. Read AT+CMEE? +CMEE: <n> OK The Read command returns the current setting format of the result code. Test AT+CMEE=? +CMEE: (list of supported <n>s) OK The Test command returns values supported by the terminal as a compound value.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-388.html">PAGE 388</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile Table 3-197: +CME Errors <Parameter> <err> 3-300 Description Numeric format followed by verbose format: 0, "phone failure" 1, "no connection to phone" 2, "phone-adaptor link reserved" 3, "operation not allowed" 4, "operation not supported" 5, "PH-SIM PIN required" 6, "PH-FSIM PIN required" 7, "PH-FSIM PUK required" 10, "SIM not inserted" 11, "SIM PIN required" 12, "SIM PUK required" 13, "SIM failure" 14, "SIM busy" 15, "SIM wrong" 16, "incorrect password" 17, "SIM PIN2 req</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-389.html">PAGE 389</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-197: +CME Errors (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-390.html">PAGE 390</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile aborted) and Error 280, Data lost is sent to the terminal instead of OK (and the missing data).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-391.html">PAGE 391</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-198: +CMS Errors (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-392.html">PAGE 392</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile AT+VTD +CME ERROR: operation not supported 3-304 AT Commands Reference Manual August 5, 2008</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-393.html">PAGE 393</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CEER, Extended Error Report This execution command returns an extended error report containing one or more lines of information text <report>, determined by the manufacturer, providing reasons for the following errors: • Failure in the last unsuccessful call setup (originating or answering) or the in-call modification. • Last call release.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-394.html">PAGE 394</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile The following table shows the +CEER parameters. Table 3-200: +CEER Parameters <Parameter> 3-306 Description <n> 1 Returns numeric response. 2 Returns verbose response. The default value is 2. <report> The total number of characters and line terminators (up to 2041) in the information text. The text must not contain the sequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-395.html">PAGE 395</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-200: +CEER Parameters (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-396.html">PAGE 396</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile +MGEER, GPRS Extended Error Report This command is used to return the PDP context activation reject cause. The reject cause may be because of unsuccessful PDP context activation initiated by the MS.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-397.html">PAGE 397</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MGEER parameters. Table 3-201: +MGEER Parameters <Parameter> August 5, 2008 Description <n> Indicates what format of cause needs to be printed. The default value is 2. 1 Returns numeric cause format. 2 Returns text cause format. <cause> The PDP context activation reject cause.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-398.html">PAGE 398</a></h6> <p>Modem Configuration and Profile Example AT+MGEER=2 OK AT+MGEER +MGEER: NO INFORMATION AVAILABLE OK AT+MGEER? +MGEER: 2 OK AT+MGEER=? +MGEER: (1-2) OK 3-310 AT Commands Reference Manual August 5, 2008</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-399.html">PAGE 399</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference UI (User Interface) +CRSM, Restricted SIM Access This command provides limited access to the Elementary Files on the SIM. Access to the SIM database is restricted to the commands which are listed at <command>. All parameters of AT+CRSM are used as specified by GSM 11.11 version 8.7.0. As response to the command, the G24 sends the actual SIM information parameters and response data.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-400.html">PAGE 400</a></h6> <p>UI (User Interface) The following table shows the +CRSM parameters. Table 3-202: +CRSM Parameters <Parameter> <command> Description Integer type. Command passed on by the ME to the SIM. 176 178 192 214 220 242 <file_id> 3-312 Read BINARY Read RECORD Get RESPONSE Update BINARY Update RECORD STATUS Integer type. This is the identifier of a elementary data file on SIM. Mandatory for every <command> except of STATUS.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-401.html">PAGE 401</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-202: +CRSM Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> <P1>,<P2>, <P3> Description Integer type. Parameters passed on by the ME to the SIM. These parameters are mandatory for every command, except GET RESPONSE and STATUS. READ BINARY <P1> Offset high (0...255) <P2> Offset low (0...255) <P3> Length (0...255) READ BINARY <P1> Rec. No. (0...</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-402.html">PAGE 402</a></h6> <p>UI (User Interface) Table 3-202: +CRSM Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> <sw1> <sw2> Description Integer character format. Information, from the SIM, about the execution of the actual command. These parameters are delivered to the TE in both cases, on successful or failed execution of the command.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-403.html">PAGE 403</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-202: +CRSM Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> Description <sw1> <response> <sw2> Error Description 152 80 Increase cannot be performed, Max value reached. 103 XX Incorrect parameter P3 (NOTE: 'XX' gives the correct length or states that no additional information is given ('XX' = '00'). 107 XX Incorrect parameter P1 or P2. 109 XX Unknown instruction code given in the command. 110 XX Wrong instruction class given in the command.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-404.html">PAGE 404</a></h6> <p>UI (User Interface) OK AT+CRSM=220,28474,1,4,30, 657469FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF //UPDATE RECORD, ADN file(6F3A), 1sh record, current, 30 bytes data +CRSM: 144,0 OK //Generic success code AT+CRSM=242,28589 //STATUS (6fad) +CRSM: 144,0,000060907F200200000000000991001C080085858585 //Generic success code, 0000-> RFU 6090-> Total amount of memory of the selected directory which is not allocated to any of the DFs or EFs under the selected directory.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-405.html">PAGE 405</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example at&v ACTIVE PROFILE: E1 Q0 V1 X4 &C1 &D2 &K3 &Y0 S00:000 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:004 S07:050 S08:004 S09:006 S10:014 S12:040 S14:AAH S16:80H S18:000 S21:30H S22:F6H S23:1BH S25:005 S26:001 S27:09H STORED PROFILE 0: E1 Q0 V1 X4 &C1 &D2 &K3 S00:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S07:050 S12:040 STORED PROFILE 1: E1 Q0 V1 X4 &C1 &D2 &K3 S00:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S07:050 S12:040 OK &W, Store User Profile Command Type Set Syntax Resp</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-406.html">PAGE 406</a></h6> <p>UI (User Interface) Table 3-204: Profile Parameters (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-407.html">PAGE 407</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference &Y, Default User Profile Command Type Set Syntax &Y[<n>] Response/Action OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The following table shows the &Y parameters. Table 3-205: &Y Parameters <Parameter> <n> Description User’s profile number: 0 Selects power-up configuration to user’s profile 0 1 Selects power-up configuration to user’s profile 1 The default value is 0.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-408.html">PAGE 408</a></h6> <p>UI (User Interface) commands like ATH/AT+CHLD and so on. Note: The +CKPD command does not support DTMF tones. Command Type Set Response/Action +CKPD=<keys>[,<time>[,<pause>]] Remarks OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The following table shows the +CKPD parameters. Table 3-206: +CKPD Parameters <Parameter> Description <keys> Virtual keycode (See Table 3-205). <time> Time for which to hold the key (in 0.1 seconds) 0...</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-409.html">PAGE 409</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-207: Character Codes (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-410.html">PAGE 410</a></h6> <p>UI (User Interface) The following table shows the +MKPD parameters. Table 3-208: +MKPD Parameters <Parameter> Description <state> Key press state 0 Release 1 Press <key> Virtual keycodes, described in Table 3-207.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-411.html">PAGE 411</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CMER, Mobile Equipment Event Reporting Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +CMER=[<mode> [,<keyp>[,<disp> [,<ind>[,<bfr>]]]]] OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The Set command enables/disables an external accessory to receive event reports from the G24. In some cases, this is used to track the user activity for redisplay on a vehicle system, or to perform accessory-specific menu operations.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-412.html">PAGE 412</a></h6> <p>UI (User Interface) Table 3-209: +CMER Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> Description <ind> 0 No indicator events reporting. 1 Indicator event +CIEV: <ind>,<value>. <ind> shows the indicator order number and <value> is new value of indicator. The default value is 0. <bfr> Controls the effect on buffered codes. 0 Clear buffer. +CLAN, ME Language This command handles the selection of language in the ME. The <code> parameter is a two-letter abbreviation of the language.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-413.html">PAGE 413</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-210: +CLAN Parameters (Cont.) <code> Description FI Finnish NO Norwegian EL Greek TR Turkish Example AT+CLAN? +CLAN: "EN" OK AT+CLAN=? +CLAN: "DE","EN","IT","FR","ES","NL","SW","DA","PT","FI","NO","EL","TR" OK AT+CLAN="DE" OK AT+CLAN? +CLAN: "DE" OK +CIND, Indicator Control This command is used to query the status of various ME indicators. Command Type August 5, 2008 Syntax Response/Action Remarks Read AT+CIND? +CIND:<ind>,<ind>….</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-414.html">PAGE 414</a></h6> <p>UI (User Interface) The following table shows the +CIND parameters. Table 3-211: +CIND Parameters <Parameter> Description <service> 0 1 Service not available. Service available. <call> 0 1 No call in progress. Call in progress. <recsms> 0 1 No unread messages. Unread messages exist. <roam> 0 1 2 ME is camped on a home network. ME is roaming on home network. ME is roaming on other network. <signal> 0 1 2 3 4 5 ME has no service. ME has 1 bar of signal strength.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-415.html">PAGE 415</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MHDPB, Motorola Headset Dual-position Button This command is used to enable and disable the SEND/END functionality of the headset dual-position button. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Set AT+MHDPB=<mo de> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> Read AT+MHDPB? +MHDPB=<mode> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> Test AT+MHDPB=? +MHDP: possible value of <mode> OK Remarks The following table shows the +MHDPB parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-416.html">PAGE 416</a></h6> <p>UI (User Interface) OK atd44345678; OK >Long press on the headset dual-position button: > The call is continuing.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-417.html">PAGE 417</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Unsolicited UI Status Messages Certain actions performed in the G24 UI by the user are transmitted to all attached accessories, primarily as a notification of a change in state. For example, notification of a phone-book storage, recall operation or setting a call restriction level. These messages are required by certain accessories to maintain local information, or to provide additional information on an auxiliary display.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-418.html">PAGE 418</a></h6> <p>UI (User Interface) +CDEV, Change Display Indication When text on the display changes and the <disp> parameter of the +CMER command is set to 1, the +CDEV indication is sent to the DTE. Unsolicited Report +CDEV: <x>,<y>,<text>,<highlighted> Table 3-214: +CDEV Parameters <Parameter> Description <x> Indicates the x coordinate of the text. <y> Indicates the x coordinate of the text. <text> Is the new value of the text element.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-419.html">PAGE 419</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-215: +CIEV Parameters (Cont.) <ind> Description <value> Range Explanation 6 SIM Pin 1 requested 0/1 0 1 SIM pin ready SIM pin required 7 SIM SMS full 0/1 0 1 SIM SMS storage is not full SIM SMS storage is full 8 GPRS coverage 0-2 0 1 2 No GPRS coverage GPRS coverage EDGE coverage Note: GPRS/EDGE coverage will be detected only when SIM has GPRS ability.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-420.html">PAGE 420</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE GPRS/EDGE GPRS Functionality GSM 07.07 defines commands that a TE may use to control a GPRS ME via a non-multiplexed character-stream interface. This places certain limitations on the functionality of the interface. For example, it is not possible for the ME to send control information to the TE or for the TE to send commands to the ME whilst the interface is in the online data state, unless the layer 2 protocol itself supports this feature (GSM 07.60-12).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-421.html">PAGE 421</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CGCLASS, GPRS Mobile Station Class This command is used to set the G24 to operate according to the specified GPRS mobile class. If the requested class is not supported, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Read AT +CGCLASS? +CGCLASS: <class> The Read command returns the current GPRS mobile class.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-422.html">PAGE 422</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE +CGDCONT, Define PDP Context This command specifies the PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context. Command Type Set 3-334 Syntax Response/Action Remarks AT+CGDCONT=[<cid> [,<PDP_type>[,<APN> [,<PDP_addr>[,<d_com p> [,<h_comp>]]]]]] OK The Set command specifies the context identification parameter values for a or: PDP context.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-423.html">PAGE 423</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +CGDCONT parameters. Table 3-218: +CGDCONT Parameters <Parameter> Description <cid> Numeric parameter specifying a particular PDP context definition (PDP Context Identifier). The parameter is local to the Terminal-Mobile Terminal interface and is used in other PDP context-related commands. The Test command returns the range of permitted values (minimum value=1).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-424.html">PAGE 424</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE +CGDCONT: 3,"IP","","0.0.0.0",0,0 OK AT+CGDCONT= 1,"IP","internetg","0.0.0.0",0,0 OK AT+CGDCONT? +CGDCONT: 1,"IP","internetg","0.0.0.0",0,0 +CGDCONT: 2,"IP","","0.0.0.0",0,0 +CGDCONT: 3,"IP","","0.0.0.0",0,0 OK AT+CGDCONT= 1,"IP","internetg","0.0.0.0",0,0 OK AT+CGDCONT=2,"IP","internetg","0.0.0.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-425.html">PAGE 425</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Read AT+CGQMIN? +CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence>, <delay>, <reliability>,<peak>, <mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence>,<delay>, <reliability.>, <peak>, <mean>[...]] OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The Read command returns the current settings for each defined context.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-426.html">PAGE 426</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Example AT+CGQMIN=? +CGQMIN: ("IP"),(0-3),(0-4),(0-5),(0-9),(0-18,31) OK AT+CGQMIN? +CGQMIN: 1,2,4,3,9,10 +CGQMIN: 2,2,4,3,9,10 +CGQMIN: 3,2,4,3,9,10 OK +CGQREQ, Quality of Service Profile (Requested) This command enables the terminal to specify a Quality of Service Profile that is used when the ME sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network. Command Type 3-338 Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+CGQREQ=[<cid> [,<precedence> [,<delay> [,<reliability.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-427.html">PAGE 427</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +CGQREQ parameters. Table 3-220: +CGQREQ Parameters <Parameter> Description <cid> A numeric parameter that specifies a particular PDP context definition. The value is from 1 to 3. <precedence> A numeric parameter that specifies the precedence class. <delay> A numeric parameter that specifies the delay class. <reliability> A numeric parameter that specifies the reliability class.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-428.html">PAGE 428</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+CGATT= [<state>] OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The Set command attaches/detaches the ME to/from the GPRS service. Read AT+CGATT? +CGATT: <state> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The Read command returns the current GPRS service state. Test AT+CGATT=? +CGATT: (list of supported <state>s) OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The Test command requests information on the supported GPRS service states. Note: This command has the characteristics of both the V.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-429.html">PAGE 429</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference D*99, Request GPRS Service "D" This command enables the ME to perform the actions necessary for establishing communication between the terminal and the external Packet Data Network (PDN). The ITU V.25ter 'D' (Dial) command causes the ME to enter the ITU V.25ter Online Data state and together with the terminal, to start the specified layer 2 protocol. The ME returns CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the command prior to entering the ITU V.25ter Online Data state.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-430.html">PAGE 430</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the D*99 parameters. Table 3-222: D*99 Parameters <Parameter> Description <GPRS_SC> (GPRS Service Code) Digit string (value 99) which identifies a request to use GPRS. <called_addres s> String that identifies the called party in the address space applicable to the PDP. For communications software that does not support arbitrary characters in the dial string, a numeric equivalent may be used.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-431.html">PAGE 431</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CGPRS, GPRS Coverage This command indicates whether there is GPRS coverage. Note: GPRS/EDGE coverage will be detected only when SIM has GPRS ability. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Execute AT+CGPRS +CGPRS: <mode> The Execute command returns the mode of the GPRS coverage.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-432.html">PAGE 432</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE +CGACT, PDP Context Activate or Deactivate This command activates/deactivates the specified PDP context(s). Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+CGACT=[<state> [,<cid> [,<cid>[,]]]] OK or: NO CARRIER or: +CME ERROR: <err> The Set command activates/deactivates the specified PDP context(s). When the command is completed, the ME remains in V.25 command state. If any PDP context is already in the requested state, the state for that context remains unchanged.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-433.html">PAGE 433</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+CGACT=? +CGACT: (0,1) OK AT+CGACT? +CGACT: 1,0 +CGACT: 2,0 +CGACT: 3,0 OK AT+CGACT=1 ERROR //GPRS network not present. Note: In some GPRS networks, +CGACT is not supported. the ATD*99 # command can be used to establish a connection. Activating a context can take up to 150 seconds. Deactivating a context can take up to 40 seconds. When aborting a +CGACT Set command, the context is closed. This can take up to 40 seconds.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-434.html">PAGE 434</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +CGPADDR parameters. Table 3-225: +CGPADDR Parameters <Parameter> Description <cid> A numeric parameter that specifies a particular PDP context definition. If no <cid> is specified, the addresses for all defined context are returned. <PDP_address> A string that identifies the MT in the address space applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or dynamic.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-435.html">PAGE 435</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Operation of this command is flex dependant. Command Type Execute Syntax AT+MDLC Response/Action Remarks OK or: ERROR Note: Testing of the local connection feature can be done using a Windows dialer. To allow this, the command ATD*98# can be used instead of AT+MDLC, for testing purpose only. Example AT+MDLC CONNECT NO CARRIER +MIAU, IP Addresses Utility This command is intended for use in applications utilizing the IP Director feature.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-436.html">PAGE 436</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +MIAU parameters. Table 3-226: +MIAU Parameters <Parameter> Description <UM-IP-address> Quoted text string of standard IP address format, i.e. four octets of range 0-255, in decimal format, separated by points. Default value at production is 192.168.1.1. <External-CPU-IP-address> Quoted text string of standard IP address format, i.e. four octets of range 0-255, in decimal format, separated by points. Default value at production is 192.168.1.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-437.html">PAGE 437</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference EDGE Commands Note: The following commands will be used only with G24 modules that support Edge. +CGEQREQ, EDGE Quality of Service Profile (requested) This command allows the TE to specify a EDGE Quality of Service Profile that is used when the MT sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-438.html">PAGE 438</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Command Type Read 3-350 Syntax +CGEQREQ? Response/Action Remarks +CGEQREQ: <cid>, <Traffic The read command returns the current settings class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL> for each defined context.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-439.html">PAGE 439</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Test August 5, 2008 Syntax +CGEQREQ=? Response/Action Remarks +CGEQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum bitrate UL>s), (list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s), (list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate UL>s), (list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL>s),(list of supported <Delivery order>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s) ,(list of supported <SDU error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error ra</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-440.html">PAGE 440</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +CGEQREQ command parameters. Table 3-227: +CGEQREQ Command Parameters <Parameter> 3-352 Description <cid> Numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands). <Traffic class> Numeric parameter that indicates the type of application for which the EDGE bearer service is optimized.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-441.html">PAGE 441</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-227: +CGEQREQ Command Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> August 5, 2008 Description <Delivery order> Numeric parameter that indicates whether the EDGE bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not. 0 - no 1 - yes 2 - subscribed value. Other values are reserved. <Maximum SDU size>: a numeric parameter (1,2,3,…) that indicates the maximum allowed SDU size in octets. If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-442.html">PAGE 442</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Example Set commands: AT+CGEQREQ=1,1,64,64,64,64,1,0,"1E4","1E4",1,0,3 OK AT+CGEQREQ=2,2,32,32,16,16,2,1000,"1E4",,0,0,2 OK AT+CGEQREQ=3,3,0,0,0,0,0,1500,"1E4",,0,1000,1 OK Read commands: AT+CGEQREQ? +CGEQREQ: 1,1,64,64,64,64,1,0,"1E4","1E4",1,0,3 +CGEQREQ: 2,2,32,32,0,0,2,1000,"1E4","0E0",0,0,2 +CGEQREQ: 3,3,0,0,0,0,0,1500,"1E4","0E0",0,0,1 OK Test commands: AT+CGEQREQ=? +CGEQREQ: IP,(0-4),(0-384),(0-384),(0-64),(0-384),(0-2),(0-1500),(0E0|1E2|1E3|1E 4|1E5|1E6),(0E0|5E2|1E2|4E3|1E3|1E4|1E5|1E6|6</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-443.html">PAGE 443</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CGEQMIN, (Minimum acceptable) This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile, which is checked by the MT against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate/Modify PDP Context Accept message.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-444.html">PAGE 444</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Command Type Read 3-356 Syntax +CGEQMIN? Response/Action Remarks +CGEQMIN: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL>, <Maximum bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>, <Delivery order> ,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error ratio> ,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs> ,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling priority> [<CR><LF>+CGEQMIN: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL> ,<Maximum bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>, <Deli</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-445.html">PAGE 445</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Test August 5, 2008 Syntax +CGEQMIN=? Response/Action Remarks +CGEQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum bitrate UL>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s), (list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate UL>s), (list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL>s) ,(list of supported <Delivery order>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s) ,(list of supported <SDU error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error r</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-446.html">PAGE 446</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +CGEQMIN command parameters. Table 3-228: +CGEQMIN Command Parameters <Parameter> 3-358 Description <cid> Numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands). <Traffic class> Numeric parameter that indicates the type of application for which the EDGE bearer service is optimized.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-447.html">PAGE 447</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-228: +CGEQMIN Command Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> August 5, 2008 Description <Delivery order> Numeric parameter that indicates whether the EDGE bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not. 0 - no 1 - yes 2 - subscribed value. Other values are reserved. <Maximum SDU size>: a numeric parameter (1,2,3,…) that indicates the maximum allowed SDU size in octets. If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-448.html">PAGE 448</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Example Set commands: AT+CGEQMIN=1,1,64,64,64,64,1,0,"1E4","1E4",1,0,3 OK AT+CGEQMIN=2,2,32,32,16,16,2,1000,"1E4",,0,0,2 OK AT+CGEQMIN=3,3,0,0,0,0,0,1500,"1E4",,0,1000,1 OK Read commands: AT+CGEQMIN? +CGEQMIN: 1,1,64,64,64,64,1,0,"1E4","1E4",1,0,3 +CGEQMIN: 2,2,32,32,0,0,2,1000,"1E4","0E0",0,0,2 +CGEQMIN: 3,3,0,0,0,0,0,1500,"1E4","0E0",0,0,1 OK Test commands: AT+CGEQMIN=? +CGEQMIN: IP,(0-4),(0-384),(0-384),(0-64),(0-384),(0-2),(0-1500),(0E0|1E2|1E3|1E 4|1E5|1E6),(0E0|5E2|1E2|4E3|1E3|1E4|1E5|1E6|6</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-449.html">PAGE 449</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +CGEQNEG - (Negotiated) This command allows the TE to retrieve the negotiated QoS profiles returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-450.html">PAGE 450</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +CGEQNEG command parameters. Table 3-229: +CGEQNEG Command Parameters <Parameter> 3-362 Description <cid> Numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands). <Traffic class> Numeric parameter that indicates the type of application for which the EDGE bearer service is optimized.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-451.html">PAGE 451</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-229: +CGEQNEG Command Parameters (Cont.) <Parameter> August 5, 2008 Description <Delivery order> Numeric parameter that indicates whether the EDGE bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not. 0 - no 1 - yes 2 - subscribed value Other values are reserved. <Maximum SDU size>: a numeric parameter (1,2,3,…) that indicates the maximum allowed SDU size in octets. If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-452.html">PAGE 452</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Example AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","INTERNETG" OK AT+CGACT=1,1 OK AT+CGEQNEG=1 +CGEQNEG: 1,2,64,64,64,64,0,1500,"1E4","4E3",0,4100,3 OK Note 1:In accordance with 3GGP TS 23.107 Ver.4.4.0 - clause 6.5, not all combinations of "set" parameters may be applied for +CGEQREQ and +CGEQMIN commands. A table of possible combinations is given below.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-453.html">PAGE 453</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MCEG, Motorola Control EGPRS This AT command is used to enable or disable EGPRS support in G24 modules with EDGE support capability. The command works only in G24 customer models with EDGE capability. The phone restarts 10 seconds after the SET command execution completed. The changes take effect after restart. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+MCEG=<n> OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The SET command used for setting the current EGPRS support state.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-454.html">PAGE 454</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE STK The SIM Application Toolkit (STK) is a set of applications and related procedures, which may be used in conjunction with SIM or Smart Cards during a GSM session. The STK provides mechanisms that enable applications existing in the SIM to interact and operate with any ME (such as the G24) that support these mechanisms. The following scheme shows the SIM Toolkit functionality commands and unsolicited results that are implemented. All these commands are non-basic commands.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-455.html">PAGE 455</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference STK Mechanisms The mechanisms defined for the STK (Table 3-231) are dependent upon the relevant commands and protocols found in GSM 11.11. Table 3-231: STK Mechanisms Mechanism Description Profile Download Enables the G24 to tell the SIM what its capabilities are. (The G24 is aware of the SIM’s capabilities via the SIM Service Table and EFPHASE.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-456.html">PAGE 456</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +MTKR parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-457.html">PAGE 457</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-234: Profile Structure – Byte 2 (Other) Bit Description b1 Command result b2 Call Control by SIM b3 Cell identity included in Call Control by SIM b4 MO short message control by SIM b5 Handling of the alpha identifier according to reference 1 subclause 9.1.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-458.html">PAGE 458</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Table 3-236: Profile Structure – Byte 4 (Proactive SIM) (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-459.html">PAGE 459</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-239: Profile Structure – Byte 7 (Multiple card proactive commands) Bit Description b3 Proactive SIM: PERFORM CARD APDU b4 Proactive SIM: GET READER STATUS (Card reader status) b5 Proactive SIM: GET READER STATUS (Card reader identifier) b6 RFU, bit = 0 b7 b8 Table 3-240: Profile Structure – Byte 8 (Proactive SIM) Bit Description b1 Proactive SIM: TIMER MANAGEMENT (start, stop) b2 Proactive SIM: TIMER MANAGEMENT (get current value) b3 Proactive SIM:</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-460.html">PAGE 460</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Table 3-241: Profile Structure – Byte 9 (Proactive SIM) (Cont.) Bit Description b7 Proactive SIM: LAUNCH BROWSER b8 RFU, bit = 0 Table 3-242: Profile Structure – Byte 10 (Soft keys support) Bit Description b1 Soft keys support for SELECT ITEM (see 3GPP TS 11.14 version 8.9.0 Release 1999, subclause 6.4.9) b2 Soft Keys support for SET UP MENU (see 3GPP TS 11.14 version 8.9.0 Release 1999, subclause 6.4.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-461.html">PAGE 461</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-244: Profile Structure – Byte 12 (Bearer independent protocol proactive commands – class "e") Bit Description b1 Proactive SIM: OPEN CHANNEL b2 Proactive SIM: CLOSE CHANNEL b3 Proactive SIM: RECEIVE DATA b4 Proactive SIM: SEND DATA b5 Proactive SIM: GET CHANNEL STATUS b6 RFU, bit = 0 b7 b8 Table 3-245: Profile Structure – Byte 13 (Bearer independent protocol supported bearers – class "e") Bit Description b1 CSD supported by ME b2 GPRS supported b</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-462.html">PAGE 462</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Table 3-246: Profile Structure – Byte 14 (Screen height) (Cont.) Bit b6 Description RFU, bit = 0 b7 b8 Screen Sizing Parameters supported as defined in 3GPP TS 11.14 version 8.9.0 Release 1999, section 5.3 Table 3-247: Profile Structure – Byte 15 (Screen width) Bit b1 Description Number of characters supported across the ME display, as defined in 3GPP TS 11.14 version 8.9.0 Release 1999, subclause 5.3.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-463.html">PAGE 463</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-249: Profile Structure – Byte 17 (Bearer independent protocol supported transport interface – class "e") Bit Description b1 TCP b2 UDP b3 RFU, bit = 0 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 Table 3-250: Profile Structure – Byte 18 (Reserved) Bit b1 Description RFU, bit = 0 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 August 5, 2008 AT Commands Reference Manual 3-375</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-464.html">PAGE 464</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Table 3-251: Profile Structure – Byte 19 (Reserved for TIA/EIA-136 facilities) Bit Description b1 Protocol Version, coded as indicated in TIA/EIA-136-123 b2 b3 b4 b5 RFU, bit = 0 b6 b7 b8 Note: The bits comprising each subsequent byte are all: RFU, bit = 0. +MTKE, Motorola ToolKit Enable This command enables/disables the SIM ToolKit functionality.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-465.html">PAGE 465</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+MTKE=? +MTKE: (0-1) OK AT+MTKE? +MTKE: 0 OK //Test command SIM ToolKit set facilities //No activation of SIM ToolKit functionality AT+MTKE=1 OK //Set all facilities SIM ToolKit (class 2).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-466.html">PAGE 466</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the+MTKP Field Descriptions. Table 3-253: +MTKP Field Descriptions Cmd Type Description Responses 1 Provides data about the "Display text" pro-active command. +MTKP: <ProactiveCmdType>,<Priority>,<Text> 2 Provides data about the "Get Inkey" pro-active command. +MTKP: <ProactiveCmdType>,<ResponseType>,<HelpInfo >[,<Text>] 3 Provides data about the "Get Input' pro-active command.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-467.html">PAGE 467</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MTKP parameters. Table 3-254: +MTKP Parameters of MTKP Field Description <Parameter> Description ProactiveCmdType=1 (Display Text) <Priority> 0 1 <Text> Text information in ASCII format. Normal priority of display. High priority of display. ProactiveCmdType=2 (Get Inkey) <ResponseType> 0 1 2 3 Digit (0-9, *, #,and +) SMS alphabet. UCS2 characters Yes/No <HelpInfo> 0 1 No help information available. Help information is available.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-468.html">PAGE 468</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Table 3-254: +MTKP Parameters of MTKP Field Description (Cont.) <Parameter> Description Values when ProactiveCmdType=9 (Send SMS) <Text> Text information in ASCII format. Values when ProactiveCmdType=10 (Send SS) <Text> Text information in ASCII format. Values when ProactiveCmdType=12 (Setup Call) <Parameter> 0 1 2 Set up call, but only if not currently busy on another call. Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold. Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-469.html">PAGE 469</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Set August 5, 2008 Syntax AT+MTKP=<Cmd Type>,<Result> [,<Data>] Response/Action OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> AT Commands Reference Manual Remarks The Set command allows the user to answer the following proactive commands: • GET_INKEY Key pressed from the user. • GET_INPUT Message entered by the user. • Enable/disable the DTMF service by the user. • Launch browser. • Set up event kist.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-470.html">PAGE 470</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +MTKP Set parameters. Table 3-255: +MTKP Set Command Parameters <Parameter> <CmdType> Description 2 3 Response for a "Get Inkey" Response for a "Get Input" Values when CmdType=2 (Get Inkey) <Result> 0 1 2 <Data> Key pressed by the user. Session ended by user. Response given by the user. Help information required by user. Values when CmdType=3 (Get Input) <Result> 0 1 2 <Data> String of characters entered by the user. Session ended by user.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-471.html">PAGE 471</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Send DTMF This proactive SIM service command requests the G24 to send a DTMF string after successfully establishing a call. This command can be used at any time during a call. The G24 does not locally generate audible DTMF tones to play to the user. This command can be activated/deactivated by the user using the command +MTKP=24. The setting defined by the user is retained during the currently active call and is restored after a power cycle.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-472.html">PAGE 472</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The diagram below demonstrates the communication between the SIM, the G24 and the TE regarding a DTMF command during an active voice call. SIM ME TE AT+MTKP? +MTKP: 24,1 Send DTMF DTMF Sent +MTKP: 24,”<alpha id>” AT+MTKP=24,0 AT+MTKP? +MTKP: 24,0 Send DTMF Unable to process Figure 3-15: Communication During DTMF Command Launch Browser This is a proactive command that requests a browser inside a browser-enabled user terminal to interpret the content corresponding to a URL.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-473.html">PAGE 473</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MTKP parameters for response code 26. Table 3-256: +MTKP Parameters – Response Code 26 <Parameter> <result> Description 0 1 <additional info> Success Failure 0 No specific cause can be given 1 Bearer unavailable 2 Browser unavailable 3 G24 unable to read provisioning data Note: Additional info should be added only in case of failure. <err> 1 Unknown result value.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-474.html">PAGE 474</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Table 3-257: Current Event Types (Cont.) Event Call Disconnected Event Performed by G24; no indication sent to the TE. Location Status Event Performed by G24; no indication sent to the TE. User Activity Event Initiated by TE and reported via +MTKP command. TE is responsible for deciding what triggers this event. Only the event occurrence is monitored by G24; no additional information is required. Idle Screen Available Event Initiated by TE and reported via +MTKP command.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-475.html">PAGE 475</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the Set Event List parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-476.html">PAGE 476</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Language Codes The following table lists an example of the codes for each language supported by the STK for Language Selection Events.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-477.html">PAGE 477</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-259: Sample Language Codes (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-478.html">PAGE 478</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Table 3-259: Sample Language Codes (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-479.html">PAGE 479</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-259: Sample Language Codes (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-480.html">PAGE 480</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Table 3-259: Sample Language Codes (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-481.html">PAGE 481</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MTKM, Motorola ToolKit Menu (Response) Command Type Syntax Response AT+MTKM Response/Action Remarks +MTKM: [<DefaultItem>]<Alpha Identifier menu> +MTKM: <Idx1>, <NoOfItems>, <Alpha Idx1>, <Help Info> +MTKM: <Idx2>, <NoOfItems>, <Alpha Idx2>, <Help Info> […]] This result appears after the SIM has sent the proactive command Select Item (as a result of the item selection by the user). The following table shows the +MTKM unsolicited identification parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-482.html">PAGE 482</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE AT+MTKM=1,1 OK //Select Item 1. +MTKP: 3,1,0,3,8,0,Enter Country name://User is requested to enter country name AT+MTKP=3,1,"England" OK //User enters the country. //Text information is sent from the SIM. + MTKP: 1,0,"Weather in England is 5ºC" +MTKC, Motorola ToolKit Call Control This unsolicited event notifies the terminal when supplementary services, SMS Control or Call Control are modified.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-483.html">PAGE 483</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference TCP/IP +MIPCALL, Create a Wireless Link This command sets up a PPP (Point to Point Protocol) connection with the GGSN (Gate GPRS Support Node) or with the CSD provider - depending on operation parameter value, and returns a valid dynamic IP for the G24.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-484.html">PAGE 484</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +MIPCALL parameters. Table 3-263: +MIPCALL Parameters <Parameter> Description operation 0 - disconnect a link 1 - establish GPRS link 2 - establish CSD link <status> 0 1 "APN" APN of service provider (in quotation marks). Contact your service provider for details. "Phone Number" Phone number of CSD service provider (in quotation marks). Contact your service provider for details. "User name" User name in provider server (in quotation marks).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-485.html">PAGE 485</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MIPOPEN, Open a Socket (UDP or TCP) This command causes the G24 module to initialize a new socket that waits for a connection from a remote machine or opens a common or TCP secured with SSL connection with a remote side (according to received parameters). Each socket allocates an accumulating buffer whose size is 1372 bytes. Note: MIPxxx is a complete set of GPRS commands. This set should not be used with other GPRS commands, such as CGATT, CGACT, and so on.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-486.html">PAGE 486</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +MIPOPEN parameters. Table 3-264: +MIPOPEN Parameters <Parameter> Description Socket ID A unique number that identifies a connection. Valid socket numbers - 1,2,3 and 4 Source Port Port of source site. Port range: 1-65535 (decimal digits) Remote IP IP: IP of the remote site in the format "AAA.BBB.CCC.DDD". The range of each octet is 0-255. Value can be written in 1, 2, or 3 digits. Host name: of remote site.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-487.html">PAGE 487</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MIPOPEN: 2,1 // Listen socket over TCP: AT+MIPOPEN=1,1100,"0.0.0.0",0,0 // Listens to any port at any IP. OK +MIPOPEN: 1,1,122.221.32.64,1200// Remote side connected to the listen socket. AT+MIPOPEN=3,3212,"122.1.222.134",0,0 // Listen to any port at specific IP. OK +MIPOPEN: 3,1,122.1.222.134,1222// Remote side connected to the listen socket. //SSL AT+MIPOPEN=2,2222,"www.google.com",443,2 // TCP secured with SSL OK +MIPOPEN: 2,2 AT+MIPOPEN=3,1234,"www.xyz.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-488.html">PAGE 488</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE SSL connection is not supported for listening sockets. Command Type 3-400 Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set AT+MIPODM= <Socket ID>, <Source Port>, <Remote IP>, <Remote Port>, <Protocol>,<Pseu do-Command Mode On/Off> OK or: +MIPODM: <Socket ID>,<State>[,<Remote IP>,<Remote Port>] or: +MIPSTAT: <Socket ID>,<Status> or: ERROR: <err> The Set command returns <Remote IP> and <Remote Port> parameters only for sockets opened in Listen mode.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-489.html">PAGE 489</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MIPODM parameters. Table 3-265: +MIPODM Parameters <Parameter> Description Socket ID A unique number that identifies a connection. Valid socket numbers - 1,2,3 and 4 Source Port Port of source site. Port range: 1-65535 (decimal digits) Remote IP IP of the remote site in the format "AAA.BBB.CCC.DDD". The range of each octet is 0-255. The value can be written in 1, 2, or 3 digits. Host-name of remote site.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-490.html">PAGE 490</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Listen socket over TCP: AT+MIPODM=1,1100,"0.0.0.0",0,0 // Listens to any port at any IP. OK +MIPODM: 1,1,122.221.32.64,1200 // Remote side connected to the listen socket. AT+MIPODM=3,3212,"122.1.222.134",0,0 // Listen to any port at specific IP. OK +MIPODM: 3,1,122.1.222.134,1222 // Remote side connected to the listen socket. //SSL AT+MIPODM=2,2222,"www.google.com",443,2// TCP secured with SSL. OK +MIPODM: 2,2// SSL connection opened. AT+MIPODM=3,1234,"www.xyz.com",443,2// TCP secured with SSL.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-491.html">PAGE 491</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MIPCLOSE parameters. Table 3-266: +MIPCLOSE Parameters <Parameter> Description <Socket_ID> A unique number that identifies a connection. Valid socket numbers - 1, 2, 3 and 4 <number_of_acknowledged_bytes > Total number of bytes that were acknowledged. <close_type> Connection close type: 0 - Connection was closed correctly. 1 - The remote side didn't reply, so connection closed by close timeout.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-492.html">PAGE 492</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE +MIPSETS, Set Size and Timeout for Automatic Push This command causes the G24 to set a watermark in the accumulating buffer and set timeout. When the watermark is reached, data is pushed from the accumulating buffer into the protocol stack. Timeout is used to define interval of time between MIPSEND command and time when data will be automatically pushed from the accumulating buffer into the protocol stack.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-493.html">PAGE 493</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+MIPSETS=1,340 //Asks the G24 to accumulate 340 bytes on socket 1 prior to sending (socket should be activated by the +mipopen command +MIPSETS: 0 OK AT+MIPSETS=1,200 //Asks the G24 to accumulate 200 bytes on socket 1 prior to sending (socket should be activated by the +mipopen command) +MIPSETS: 0 OK AT+MIPSETS=2,400 +MIPSETS: 0 OK AT+MIPSETS=? +MIPSETS: (1-4),(1-1372),(0-1000) OK AT+MIPSETS? +MIPSETS: 1,200,0 +MIPSETS: 2,400,0 OK AT+MIPSETS=1,200,50 //Asks</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-494.html">PAGE 494</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Motorola recommends that the terminal sets the watermark in the accumulating buffer prior to this command, using the +MIPSETS command. By default, the watermark is set to 1372 bytes of data. Command Type Set Syntax +MIPSEND = <Socket ID>,<Data> Response/Action Remarks ERROR Data in the +MIPSEND: <Socket ID>,<Status>,<Free +MIPSEND command is limited Size> to 80 characters (160 in coded form).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-495.html">PAGE 495</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MIPPUSH, Push Data into Protocol Stack This command causes the G24 to push the data accumulated in its accumulating buffers into the protocol stack. It is assumed that before using this command, some data should exist due to previous +MIPSEND commands. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action Remarks +MIPPUSH: +MIPPUSH = Optional parameters are used only for UDP <Socket_ID>,<Status>[ connections.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-496.html">PAGE 496</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE +MIPFLUSH, Flush Data from Buffers This command causes the G24 to flush (delete) data accumulated in its accumulating buffers. Command Type Syntax Response/Action Set +MIPFLUSH = <Socket ID> ERROR or: +MIPFLUSH: <Socket ID> OK Read +MIPFLUSH? +MIPFLUSH:[<socket ID>] Test +MIPFLUSH=? +MIPFLUSH=(<Socket ID>) The following table shows the +MIPFLUSH parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-497.html">PAGE 497</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+MIPFLUSH=2 //Socket number 2 was previously opened using the +MIPOPEN command +MIPFLUSH: 2 OK AT+MIPFLUSH=5 ERROR AT+MIPFLUSH? +MIPFLUSH: 1 2 OK +MIPRUDP, Receive Data from UDP Protocol Stack This unsolicited event is sent by the G24 to the terminal when data is received from the UDP protocol stack. Set Command Event +MIPRUDP:<Source IP>,<Source Port><socket ID>,<Left>,<Data> The following table shows the +MIPRUDP parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-498.html">PAGE 498</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +MIPRTCP parameters. Table 3-272: +MIPRTCP Parameters <Parameter> Description Socket ID 1,2,3,4 - Number of valid sockets. Left Size of received Data still left in protocol stack. Data Data string received with 0-F hexadecimal digits. String ends with a <CR>. Example +MIPRTCP: 3,0,7171 +MIPSTAT, Status Report This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal indicating a change in status.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-499.html">PAGE 499</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MIPDATA, Network Incoming Data Unsolicited Indication in Pseudo-command Mode This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal indicating a data comes from Network when G24 is in pseudo-command mode. Note: Pseudo-command mode is a special mode, allowing the user to enter AT commands from terminal, when actually opened in Online Data Mode socket suspended. The way to suspend the socket is to enter ESC sequence from terminal.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-500.html">PAGE 500</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE MIPXON, Flow Control - Xon This command is the unsolicited event that the G24 sends to the terminal when it detects that it has free memory in the accumulating buffer and can process new +MIPSEND requests, after the +MIPXOFF event. Event +MIPXON: <Socket ID> Example +MIPXON: 1 3-412 //The G24 pushed the data into the protocol stack on socket 1 and is able to handle more data from the terminal.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-501.html">PAGE 501</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference MIPCONF - Configure Internal TCP/IP stack This command allows to configure TCP stack parameters, such as retransmissions number, upper and bottom limits of retransmission timeout, close delay. It can be used to configure TCP socket parameters before socket activation or when the socket is in active state. Configuration values will be stored in G24 until power circle.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-502.html">PAGE 502</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Table 3-275: +MIPCONF Parameters Parameter Description < socket > Number of configured TCP socket (1 to 4) < retr_num > Number of retransmissions (1 to 5) < min_TO > Bottom limit to retransmit timeout (100 ms to 1 sec.) <max_TO> Upper limit to retransmit timeout (1 sec. to 60 sec.) <max_close_delay> Closing delay required by RFC 793 (100 ms to 7500 ms) <is_nack_ind_req> NACK/ACK TCP indication feature.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-503.html">PAGE 503</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MIPSTAT: 2,0,30 +MIPXON: 2 +MIPSTAT: 2,0,40 +MIPRTCP: 2,530,485454502F312E312033303220466F756E640D0A4C6F636174696F6E3A206874 74703A2F2F7777772E676F6F676C652E636F2E696C2F63786665723F633D505245462533443A544D25334 43131313935 +MIPRTCP: 2,450,31343833323A5325334467384A637631426A5458472D30636A5926707265763D 2F0D0A5365742D436F6F6B69653A20505245463D49443D363930376262383735313862663233373A43523D 313A544D3D +MIPRTCP: 2,370,313131393531343833323A4C4D3D313131393531343833323A533D644F6</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-504.html">PAGE 504</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Only one ping request execution will be allowed at any given moment. Command Type Set Syntax +MPING=<mode >[,<"Destination IP/hostname">[,< count> [,<size>[,<TTL>[, <TOS> [,<TimeOut>]]]]]] Unsolicited Response Read +MPING? Response/Action OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The set command shall send a <count> Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Echo Request messages to a target node defined by <"Destination IP/hostname"> parameter.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-505.html">PAGE 505</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MPING command parameters. Table 3-276: +MPING Command Parameters <Parameter> August 5, 2008 Description <mode> 0 - Abort current ping request execution. 1 - Launch new ping request. There is no default value - appropriate ERROR will be displayed if parameter is not supplied.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-506.html">PAGE 506</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +MPING unsolicited response parameters. Table 3-277: +MPING Unsolicited Response Parameters <Parameter> Description <"Destination IP"> Specifies the message sender machine (computer), which is identified by IP address 4 octets long in dotted decimal notation. Each octet of IP address has valid value range of 0 to 255.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-507.html">PAGE 507</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+MIPCALL=1,"internet" OK +MIPCALL: 10.170.4.111 AT+MPING=1,"10.170.4.112" OK +MPING: "10.170.4.112",0,0,400 // Ping remote computer using default parameters //Echo Reply message received, RTT is 400 ms. +MPING: "10.170.4.112",0,0,420 +MPING: "10.170.4.112",0,0,440 +MPING: "10.170.4.112",0,0,410 //Ping request execution is completed. Four Echo Request messages were sent, and four //Echo Reply messages were received. Average RTT is 417 milliseconds.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-508.html">PAGE 508</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +MPINGSTAT unsolicited response parameters. Table 3-278: +MPINGSTAT Unsolicited Response Parameters <Parameter> 3-420 Description <status> Specifies a status of ping request execution. Defined values: 0 - The unsolicited response with this <status> will be sent to DTE upon completion of ping request. If ping request was aborted or socket connection was terminated for any reason, this unsolicited response will not be reported to DTE.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-509.html">PAGE 509</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+MIPCALL=1,"internet" OK +MIPCALL: 10.170.4.111 //Ping host www.motorola.com 3 times with <TTL>=255. All other parameters are default. AT+MPING=1,"www.motorola.com",3,,255 OK //ICMP Echo Reply message received, RTT is 522 ms. +MPING: "88.221.5.223",0,0,522 +MPINGSTAT: 1 // No corresponding reply within timeout. +MPINGSTAT: 3 // Flow Control OFF. +MPINGSTAT: 4 // Flow Control ON, a new Echo Request message is sent immediately. +MPING: "88.221.5.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-510.html">PAGE 510</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE +MSDNS, Set DNS IP Address This command set/read DNS (Domain Name Server) IP address (primary/secondary) for each socket. If the user doesn't specify DNS servers by AT+MSDNS, G24 will use default DNS from NW. The defined value(s) will be saved during disconnect PDP context (can be used in next PDP context), but will reset after power cycle.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-511.html">PAGE 511</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+MSDNS=? +MSDNS: (1-5),(<IP>),(<IP>) OK AT+MSDNS? // read when MIPCALL is disconnected +MSDNS: 1,"0.0.0.0","0.0.0.0" +MSDNS: 2,"0.0.0.0","0.0.0.0" +MSDNS: 3,"0.0.0.0","0.0.0.0" +MSDNS: 4,"0.0.0.0","0.0.0.0" +MSDNS: 5,"0.0.0.0","0.0.0.0" OK AT+MSDNS=2,"212.150.49.10","206.49.94.234" //set socket 2 prim & sec DNS OK AT+MSDNS=4,"62.120.55.10" //set socket 4 prim DNS only OK AT+MSDNS=5,"212.150.49.10","206.49.94.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-512.html">PAGE 512</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE OK AT+MSDNS? +MSDNS: 1,"192.118.9.177","192.118.11.77" +MSDNS: 2,"192.118.9.177","192.118.11.77" +MSDNS: 3,"192.118.9.177","192.118.11.77" +MSDNS: 4,"192.118.9.177","192.118.11.77" +MSDNS: 5,"192.118.9.177","192.118.11.77" OK AT+MIPCALL=0 OK NO CARRIER +MIPCALL: 0 AT+MSDNS? // read when MIPCALL is disconnected +MSDNS: 1,"0.0.0.0","0.0.0.0" +MSDNS: 2,"0.0.0.0","0.0.0.0" +MSDNS: 3,"0.0.0.0","0.0.0.0" +MSDNS: 4,"0.0.0.0","0.0.0.0" +MSDNS: 5,"0.0.0.0","0.0.0.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-513.html">PAGE 513</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +MIPCSC parameters. Table 3-280: +MIPCSC Parameters <Parameter> Description <SocketID> A unique number that identifies a connection. Valid socket numbers - 1, 2, 3 and 4 <n> b11 . . . b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 Bitmap parameter that represents SSL feature behavior configuration. Every 1 bit indicates whether each alert will cause automatically connection termination or not.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-514.html">PAGE 514</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE Example AT+MIPCSC=? +MIPCSC: (1-4),(0-2047): OK AT+MIPCSC? +MIPCSC: 1,0 +MIPCSC: 2,0 +MIPCSC: 3,0 +MIPCSC: 4,0 OK AT+MIPCSC=2,256 // 256 = 00100000000 (binary), so in case of // SSL_DOMAIN_NAME_MISMATCH alert, // connection would be closed automatically. OK AT+MIPCSC? +MIPCSC: 1,0 +MIPCSC: 2,256 +MIPCSC: 3,0 +MIPCSC: 4,0 OK AT+MIPOPEN=2,2222,www.xyz.com,443,2 // connect to site using SSL protocol OK +MIPSSL: 2,19 // SSL_DOMAIN_NAME_MISMATCH alert received.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-515.html">PAGE 515</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +MIPCFF, Control Filtering Feature for Incoming TCP Connection This AT command is used to control filtering feature. Filtering feature adds the ability to accept IP connections only if the IP belongs to a defined IP white list to the embedded TCP/IP feature. This feature affects only TCP socket type connections.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-516.html">PAGE 516</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +MIPCFF parameters. Table 3-281: +MIPCFF Parameters <Parameter> <Socket_id> A unique number that identifies a connection. Valid socket numbers - 1, 2, 3 and 4 <CmdType> Type of operation. Supported types: 0 - Disable filtering. 1 - Enable filtering. 2 - Add IP to white list. 3 - Remove IP from white list. 4 - Clear IP white list.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-517.html">PAGE 517</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example AT+MIPCFF=? +MIPCFF: (1-4),(0-4),( "<IP CIDR>") OK AT+MIPCFF=2,2,"10.170.255.255/16"// Add to socket 2 rule to accept all IP's that starts with 10.170.*.* OK AT+MIPCFF=2,2 // Invalid command +CME ERROR: operation not allowed AT+MIPCFF=2,1 OK // Enable filtering for socket 2 AT+MIPCFF=2,1,"1.2.3.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-518.html">PAGE 518</a></h6> <p>GPRS/EDGE The following table shows the +MIPSSL parameters. Table 3-282: +MIPSSL Parameters <Parameter> Description <Socket_ID> 1,2,3,4 - Identification Number of Socket. <Alert_ID> Alert ID. All alerts are described in Table 3-283. The following table shows the +MIPSSL Alerts. Table 3-283: +MIPSSL Alerts Alert ID 3-430 Alert Name Description 1. SSL_BAD_RECORD_MAC Returned if a record is received with an incorrect MAC. This alert is fatal. 2.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-519.html">PAGE 519</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-283: +MIPSSL Alerts Alert ID Alert Name Description 12. SSL_CERTIFICATE_REVOKED A certificate was revoked by its signer. 13. SSL_CERTIFICATE_EXPIRED A certificate has expired or is not currently valid. 14. SSL_NO_CERTIFICATE This alert may be sent in response to a certification request if no appropriate certificate is available. 15.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-520.html">PAGE 520</a></h6> <p>FTP (File Transfer Protocol) FTP (File Transfer Protocol) Session Commands +FTPOPEN, Open FTP Connection Between G24 (FTP client) and Remote FTP Server This command causes G24 to open a FTP connection with a remote FTP server, based on given parameters. Notes: • Only one FTP connection can be in progress at the same time. • FTP connection is based on two TCP sockets: one of them configured for Online Data Mode. • Online Data Mode connection is prohibited when FTP connection is in progress and vice versa.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-521.html">PAGE 521</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +FTPOPEN parameters. Table 3-284: +FTPOPEN Parameters <Parameter> Description Range IP address in dotted decimal notation form: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. destination_ip/url1 IP or URL of remote FTP site. username2 Username for FTP login procedure. ASCII chars, max length is 255 octets. password3 Password for FTP login procedure. ASCII chars, max length is 255 octets. account4 User Account for FTP login procedure.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-522.html">PAGE 522</a></h6> <p>FTP (File Transfer Protocol) Example The first example illustrates FTP connection open success case. AT+FTPOPEN="someftpsite.com","anonymous","qwerty@somemail.com",,,, OK +FTPOPEN: 1 The second example illustrates FTP connection open error case, because another FTP connection is already opens. The AT+CMEE=2 command enables verbose error report. AT+CMEE=2 OK AT+FTPOPEN="someftpsite.com","anonymous","qwerty@somemail.com",,,, OK +FTPOPEN: 1 AT+FTPOPEN="anotherftpsite.com","anonymous","qwerty@somemail.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-523.html">PAGE 523</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference AT+CMEE=2 OK AT+FTPCLOSE +CME ERROR: FTP session is inactive +FTPINFO, FTP Unsolicited Indication Enable/Disable This command causes the G24 to enable or disable FTP unsolicited indication to the user. FTP unsolicited indication is used for debugging the FTP session and, when the indication is enabled, the G24 will show the user all FTP commands sent to the remote site and all FTP responses received from the remote side.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-524.html">PAGE 524</a></h6> <p>FTP (File Transfer Protocol) Example The example illustrates FTP connection open success case, when FTP unsolicited indication is enabled. AT+FTPINFO=1 OK AT+FTPOPEN="someftpsite.com","anonymous","qwerty@somemail.com",,,, OK +FTPINFO: 220+FTPINFO: 220-Welcome to someftpsite.com! +FTPINFO: 220+FTPINFO: 220 someftpsite.com FTP server (SecureMb FTP Version 1.0) ready. +FTPINFO: USER anonymous +FTPINFO: 331 Guest login ok, send your complete e-mail address as password. +FTPINFO: PASS qwerty@somemail.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-525.html">PAGE 525</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +FTPCWD parameters. Table 3-286: +FTPCWD Parameters <Parameter> Directory name Description Name of directory to be changed on the remote side. Range String, max length is 255 octets. Example The first example illustrates change in working directory success case. AT+FTPCWD="data" OK +FTPCWD: 1 The second example illustrates change working directory fail case; because the given directory name was not found on the remote server.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-526.html">PAGE 526</a></h6> <p>FTP (File Transfer Protocol) +FTPMKD, Make Directory This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to create a new directory in accordance to a given name. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action +FTPMKD=<directory_name > OK +FTPMKD: <result> Remarks <directory_name> parameter consists of the directory name as well as the directory path (optional).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-527.html">PAGE 527</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +FTPRMD, Remove Directory This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to remove a directory in accordance to a given name. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action +FTPRMD=<directory_name> OK +FTPRMD: <result> Remarks <directory_name> parameter consists of the directory name as well as the directory path (optional).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-528.html">PAGE 528</a></h6> <p>FTP (File Transfer Protocol) +FTPINFO: 550 1: No such file or directory. +FTPRMD: 0 +FTPPWD, Print Working Directory This command causes G24 to request the remote FTP server to return the working directory name. Command Type Set Syntax +FTPPWD Response/Action Remarks OK ... +FTPPWD: <result>[,<directory_name>] <directory_name> parameter consists of the directory name as well as the directory path (optional).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-529.html">PAGE 529</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +FTPCDUP, Change Directory Up This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to change the working directory up. Command Type Set Syntax +FTPCDUP Response/Action OK ...</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-530.html">PAGE 530</a></h6> <p>FTP (File Transfer Protocol) The following table shows the +FTPDEL parameters. Table 3-289: +FTPDEL Parameters <Parameter> Description File name Name of file to be deleted on the remote side. Range String, max length is 255 octets. Example The example illustrates delete file success case. AT+FTPDEL="somefile" OK +FTPDEL: 1 +FTPREN, Rename File This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to rename a file, in accordance with a given parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-531.html">PAGE 531</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +FTPREN parameters. Table 3-290: +FTPREN Parameters <Parameter> Description Range File name from Old name of file to be renamed on the remote side. String, max length is 255 octets. File name to New name of file to be renamed on the remote side. String, max length is 255 octets. Example The first example illustrates rename file success case. AT+FTPREN="somefile.name","anotherfile.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-532.html">PAGE 532</a></h6> <p>FTP (File Transfer Protocol) +FTPLIST, Request List This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to send a list, in accordance with a given parameter. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action +FTPLIST [=<file/directory name>] Remarks OK ... +FTPLIST: <result> <list of directory/files> ... +FTPLIST: <result> Parameter consists of the file/directory name as well as the file/directory path (optional).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-533.html">PAGE 533</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +FTPLIST: 1 The second example illustrates get list for all files success case. AT+FTPLIST="*.*" OK +FTPLIST: 2 -rw-rw-r-- 1 1001 -rw-rw-r-- 1 1001 -rw-rw-r-- 1 1001 -rw-rw-r-- 1 1001 -rw-rw-r-- 1 1001 -rw-rw-r-- 1 1001 129886 Mar 23 06:20 somefile1.name 4968 Jan 8 07:57 somefile2.name 23948 Jan 8 07:32 somefile3.name 0 Feb 7 01:56 somefile4.name 204673 Jan 10 02:28 somefile5.name 9348 Jul 19 2006 somefile6.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-534.html">PAGE 534</a></h6> <p>FTP (File Transfer Protocol) The following table shows the +FTPSTAT parameters. Table 3-292: +FTPSTAT Parameters <Parameter> File/directory name Description Name of file or directory on the remote side for status request. Range String, max length is 255 octets. Example When the user enters +FTPSTAT command without parameters, the last requested status within actual FTP connection returns.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-535.html">PAGE 535</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The fourth example illustrates using +FTPSTAT command with a parameter containing an illegal file name. In this case, the remote server returns error and FTP connection is closed by the remote side. AT+FTPSTAT="." OK +FTPSTAT: 0 +FTPCLOSE: 1 The fifth example illustrates using +FTPSTAT command for receiving the status of all files in the actual working directory. AT+FTPSTAT="*.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-536.html">PAGE 536</a></h6> <p>FTP (File Transfer Protocol) Example The example illustrates the command execution. AT+FTPSYST OK +FTPSYST: 2, UNIX Type: L8 +FTPSYST: 1 +FTPNOOP, No Operation This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to do nothing (possible use for PING). Command Type Set Syntax +FTPNOOP Response/Action OK ...</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-537.html">PAGE 537</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +FTPSTOR, Store File On Remote FTP Server This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to store a file sent by the G24. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action +FTPSTOR=<file_name>, [<file_type>] Remarks OK ... +FTPSTOR: <result> <file_name> parameter consists of the file name as well as the file path (optional). or <file_type> parameter is optional. Default value is 1 (binary).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-538.html">PAGE 538</a></h6> <p>FTP (File Transfer Protocol) Example The example illustrates the command execution. Requested file type is binary. AT+FTPSTOR="somefile.name",1 +FTPSTOR: 2 The user sends a file with <end-of-file> here +FTPSTOR: 1 +FTPRETR, Retrieve a File From a Remote FTP Server This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to send a file to the G24. Command Type Set Syntax +FTPRETR=<file_name>, [<file_type>] Response/Action Remarks OK ...</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-539.html">PAGE 539</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +FTPRETR parameters. Table 3-294: +FTPRETR Parameters <Parameter> Description Range File name Name of file to be retrieved from the remote side. String, max length is 255 octets. File type Type of file (ASCII or Binary). Numeric, in the range of 0-1 (0 = ASCII, 1 = Binary). Example The example illustrates the command execution. Requested file type is binary. AT+FTPRETR="somefile.name",1 +FTPRETR: 2 .... .... ....</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-540.html">PAGE 540</a></h6> <p>NOP - Compatible NOP - Compatible IGNORED (Compatible Only) Commands The following commands return OK, but do not execute any operation. They are only used to provide backward compatibility.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-541.html">PAGE 541</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Fax Class 1 Facsimile machines were developed for sending digitized documents over the General Switched Telephone Network (GSTN) These facsimile terminals are in widespread use around the world. The operation of facsimile terminals has been standardized in Recommendations T.4, T.6 and T.30. The cellular network also supports the facsimile service within the cellular network and also with the GSTN network.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-542.html">PAGE 542</a></h6> <p>Fax Class 1 Fax Commands +FCLASS, Select Mode The G24 facsimile service maintains a parameter for identification and control of facsimile services, "+FCLASS". When the terminal wants to establish a FAX connection, it must set the G24 to Service Class 1 operation prior to answering or originating a call. This is done by setting +FCLASS = 1.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-543.html">PAGE 543</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference +FTS, Transmit Silence This command causes the G24 to stop any transmission. The G24 then waits for the specified amount of time, and sends the OK result code to the terminal. Command Type Set Syntax Response/Action Remarks OK The Set command causes the terminal to stop any transmission. or: +CME ERROR: <err> AT+FTS = <Time> The following table shows the +FTS parameters.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-544.html">PAGE 544</a></h6> <p>Fax Class 1 The following table shows the +FRS parameters. Table 3-297: +FRS Parameters <Parameter> <Time> Description The duration of the silence, in 10 millisecond intervals. 0-255 Number of milliseconds. Example At+fclass=1 OK Atd035658584 CONNECT 9600 OK At+frs=50 OK //The G24 sends the OK after silence for 10*50 milliseconds +FTM, Transmit Data This command causes the G24 to transmit data to the remote party using the modulation selected in <MOD>.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-545.html">PAGE 545</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Command Type Syntax Response/Action Remarks Set +FTM = <MOD> OK The Set command causes the G24 to transmit data using the modulation or: selected in <MOD>. +CME ERROR: <err> Test +FTM=? (list of supported <MOD>s) OK or: +CME ERROR: <err> The following table shows the command modulation select codes. Table 3-298: Command Modulation Select Codes - Modulation Parameters <MOD> Value Modulation TrainTime Rate (bit/s) 24 Rec. V.27 ter 2 400 48 Rec. V.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-546.html">PAGE 546</a></h6> <p>Fax Class 1 +FRM, Receive Data This command causes the G24 to receive data from the remote party using the modulation specified in <MOD>. When the G24 receives the +FRM command it immediately returns a CONNECT result code. When the terminal receives the CONNECT from G24, it can start receiving the data stream using the transparent data command decoding. (Refer to Table 3-298, on page 3-456.) When the G24 receives the +FRM command, it checks the line for a carrier.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-547.html">PAGE 547</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference After the entering active session mode (G24 sent CONNECT to the terminal), the terminal can perform one of the following: • If the terminal sends additional data, the G24 transmits another frame • If the terminal sends only <DLE><ETX> (a null frame), the G24 turns off the transmit carrier and sends the CONNECT result code to the terminal • If five seconds elapses from the time the G24 reports the OK result code without any additional data transmitted from the terminal, th</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-548.html">PAGE 548</a></h6> <p>Fax Class 1 +FRH, Receive DATA with HDLC Frame This command causes the G24 to receive HDLC framed data using the modulation mode selected in <MOD>, and deliver the next received frame to the terminal. If the G24 detects the selected carrier with an HDLC flag, the G24 send the CONNECT result code to the terminal, otherwise it sends "NO CARRIER". The G24 sends the FCS octant to the terminal. The terminal may ignore the FCS.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-549.html">PAGE 549</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The implementation of this parameter is mandatory if V.42 error control or Buffered mode is provided in the G24. If not, it is optional. G24s which do not implement circuit 106 and/or circuit 133 do not need to support the value 2 for the corresponding subparameter.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-550.html">PAGE 550</a></h6> <p>Fax Class 1 +FPR, Fax Serial Port Rate This command sets the request baud rate. +FPR command is implemented as additional syntax to the standard +IPR command in order to inter-work with existing Facsimile DTE. Command Type Set Syntax +FPR=<n> Response/Action Remarks OK The set command changes the baud rate of G24 to the requested value. The or: specified rate takes effect following +CME ERROR: <err> the issuing of any result code(s) associated with the current command line.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-551.html">PAGE 551</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Example Example AT+FCLASS=1 OK AT+FPR=8 OK AT+FPR? +FPR: 8 OK AT+IPR=300 Ok AT+FPR? +FPR:255 OK AT+IPR? +IPR: 19200 OK AT+FCLASS=0 OK AT+IPR? +IPR: 19200 OK AT+FPR? +CME ERROR: operation not allowed AT+FPR=? +CME ERROR: operation not allowed August 5, 2008 AT Commands Reference Manual 3-463</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-552.html">PAGE 552</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature RS232 Multiplexer Feature The MUX provides multiple logical communication channels between the DTE and G24 over one physical RS232 connection. This service enables the DTE device to run multiple applications (such as GPRS, CSD, SMS and voice calls) while communicating simultaneously with the G24. MUX Details Protocol Versions 3G TS27.010 v.3.3.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-553.html">PAGE 553</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Product Architecture The following figure shows the former architecture (PREMUX). DTE App1 App2 G24 App3 App n C h a n n e l 1 Only one channelthis Channel alternates between App licatio ns App1 App2 App n C h a n n e l 1 HW/SW FC , Data stream Serial Mgr App3 Serial Mgr U AR T U AR T Figure 3-18: PREMUX Architecture The following figure shows the current product architecture (MUX).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-554.html">PAGE 554</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature Power-up CLD or DISC0 (When only DLC0 is opened) DTR toggle when AT&D is 4 PREMUX Time-out CLD DTR toggle (when AT&D4) MUX AT+CMUX MUX-Init SABM0 Figure 3-20: MUX States PREMUX State Once the GRLC logical communication channel between the DTE and G24 has been established, the RS232 cable is connected and the DTE device is ready to communicate. MUX-Init State This is an in-between state during which the G24 and DTE move from PREMUX to MUX.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-555.html">PAGE 555</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Service Description Power Control Services Includes both sleep and wakeup services. This service will be supported in future versions. DLC Release Services Used to disconnect a DLC exclude control channel (DLCO). Close Down Services (CLD, DISCO, Exception situations) Used to terminate multiplexer operation on the serial channel and resume GRLC operation (returns to PREMUX state).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-556.html">PAGE 556</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature MUX UART Port Speed Auto baud rate detection is disabled in the MUX. To set the UART baud rate, the G24 uses the <port speed> parameter in +CMUX command. If the parameter is absent, the MUX uses the same baud rate that was in PREMUX state. +CMUX, MUX Startup Command This command is used to enable/disable the GSM MUX multiplexing protocol stack. When the G24 receives a valid +CMUX command, it returns OK and changes its state to MUX-Init.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-557.html">PAGE 557</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference The following table shows the +CMUX parameters. Table 3-303: +CMUX Parameters <Parameter> Description <mode> MUX mode: 0 Basic 1 Advanced <subset> Defines how the MUX control channel is set up. The virtual channel is set up according to this setting.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-558.html">PAGE 558</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature MUX Customer Open Source Code Packet The MUX is provided with an open source code packet to help speed the development process and reduce the incompatible interpretations of the protocol specifications. This source code packet is saved in the VOBS and supports both Basic and Advanced modes. When implementing the MUX feature, the user should have the MUX entity installed with the product.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-559.html">PAGE 559</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Multiple Channel Configuration The configurations listed below are recommended to achieve maximum use of parallel channels with minimum conflicts.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-560.html">PAGE 560</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature DLC1 Explanation: An external host interface is used as a regular G24 RS232 channel, without MUX capabilities. It is highly recommended to enable this channel when the others are in IDLE state. One purpose of adding this channel is to give outside users who cannot see the other three channels, which are used as internal channels, the option of using the product (such as a Palm computer with a built-in G24) as purely a modem, without its other benefits.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-561.html">PAGE 561</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-304: AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration IDLC-1 IDLC-2 External AT + Voice Call + SMS $ IDLC-3 IDLC-4 Comment V PREMUX Profile Support Definition Yes %C V V V V &C V V V V Yes PCHS &D V V V V Yes PCHS &K V V V V MUX degenerate d &G V V V V Ignored &J V V V V &L V V V V Ignored &M V V V V Ignored &P V V V V Ignored &Q V V V V &R V V V V Ignored &S V V V V Ignored &T V V</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-562.html">PAGE 562</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature Table 3-304: AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-563.html">PAGE 563</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-304: AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-564.html">PAGE 564</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature Table 3-304: AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-565.html">PAGE 565</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-304: AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-566.html">PAGE 566</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature Table 3-304: AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-567.html">PAGE 567</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-304: AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-568.html">PAGE 568</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature Table 3-304: AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration (Cont.) IDLC-1 IDLC-2 External AT + Voice Call + SMS IDLC-3 IDLC-4 Comment +MIPOPE N V Yes +MIPPUS H V Yes +MIPSEN D V Yes +MIPSET S V Yes +MJDC V Yes +MKPD V Yes PCHS unsolicited +MMAD V Yes PCHS unsolicited +MMAR V Yes +MMGL V Yes +MMGR V Yes +MMICG V Yes +MNTFY V gprs V Yes +MPCM V +MPCMC V Yes +MPDPM V Yes +MPING Command is not supported within MUX.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-569.html">PAGE 569</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-304: AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-570.html">PAGE 570</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature Table 3-304: AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration (Cont.) IDLC-1 IDLC-2 External AT + Voice Call + SMS IDLC-4 Comment V V V V E V V V V F V V V V H V V V V L V V V V Ignored Yes M V V V V Ignored Yes N V V V V Ignored Yes O V V V V Refer to the D definitions at the end of the table.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-571.html">PAGE 571</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference Table 3-304: AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-572.html">PAGE 572</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature Multiple Channel Definitions The following table provides various multiple channel definitions. Table 3-305: Multiple Channel Definitions Term Description Command response A response to a command is delivered back to the channel from which the command was sent. Unsolicited indication Unsolicited indications are sent only to the channel that enabled them. Enabling indications where it is not allowed may cause unexpected results.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-573.html">PAGE 573</a></h6> <p>Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference • The two requirements above have an exception regarding the UART configuration – the settings for UART port speed and flow control (AT&K and AT+CBAUD/AT+IPR). These settings are set in PREMUX state only, and will be kept unchanged until the G24 returns to PREMUX state. If an IDLC tries to change the settings it receives an OK response, but the real value is NOT changed.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-574.html">PAGE 574</a></h6> <p>RS232 Multiplexer Feature 3-486 AT Commands Reference Manual August 5, 2008</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-575.html">PAGE 575</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands Setting Up the G24 (Power On and Initial Actions) There are three phases of connectivity for the G24: • Init General. In this phase, the G24 is asked to provide basic information which ensures that the phone is functioning properly. • Enabling the SIM. • Registering the SIM on a network in order to see that wireless access is functioning properly.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-576.html">PAGE 576</a></h6> <p>Setting Up the G24 (Power On and Initial Actions) Ready GPRS seq.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-577.html">PAGE 577</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands Recommended G24 Initialization after Powerup Figure 4-3 provides a recommended workflow for initializing the G24 after startup. The following sections explain this workflow in detail.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-578.html">PAGE 578</a></h6> <p>Recommended G24 Initialization after Powerup RS232 Lines Setup There is no dynamic detection. Upon power up, the hardware is detected. If USB is detected, then USB is selected. If USB is not connected, then the RS232 is selected. For a pin description, refer to the G24 Developer’s Kit Manual: 6889192V26.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-579.html">PAGE 579</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands Test G24 Communication This is a preliminary step. During this step, the ability to communicate with the G24 using AT commands is tested. Start Error No Echo Send 'AT' Check RS232 Connection or Change UART Baud Rate OK End Figure 4-5: Test G24 Communication Communication example: AT ATE1 AT OK //By default, the echo should be enabled //Confirm that G24 replies with OK Basic Configuration These are optional steps. If required, specific RS232 pin behavior can be selected.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-580.html">PAGE 580</a></h6> <p>Recommended G24 Initialization after Powerup 1. Baud setting example: AT+CBAUD=6//Setting baud rate for 19200 OK AT+CBAUD=19200//Same as issuing this command OK 2. RS232 HW lines configuration: &C(DCD), &D(DTR), &K(flow-control). Default settings should be: AT&C1 OK AT&D2 OK AT&K3 OK 3. Modem IDs (optional): +CGMI,+CGMM,+CGMR,+CGSN AT+CGMI +CGMI: "Motorola" OK AT+CGMM +CGMM: "GSM900","GSM1800","GSM1900","GSM850","MODEL=G24" OK AT+CGMR +CGMR: "G24_G_0C.11.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-581.html">PAGE 581</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands SIM Card Status To enable the module to transfer from basic commands to full operational mode, a SIM card must be ready and the PIN enabled. Start AT+CPIN? See Developer’s Guide +CPIN: READY End Figure 4-7: SIM Card Status Note: For a full description of SIM states, see “+CPIN, Enter PIN for Unlocking SIM Card or Enter PUK for Unblocking SIM Card” on page 3-259. The following steps are part of the SIM card status step: 1. Check SIM security: AT+CPIN? 2.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-582.html">PAGE 582</a></h6> <p>Recommended G24 Initialization after Powerup G24 Network Connection In this step, the G24 detects existing networks (the user must register to a specific network). Start 1 Sec. Delay AT+CREG=1 or 2 OK Wait for Registration Message Example: +CREG: 001,001 End Figure 4-8: G24 Network Connection 1. Registration and call indications example: +CREG, +CLCC AT+CREG=2 OK AT+CLCC=1 OK 2.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-583.html">PAGE 583</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands Terminal Synchronization In this step, the terminal requests the stored phonebook, SMS, and so on, from the G24. Start 0.5 Sec.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-584.html">PAGE 584</a></h6> <p>SMS SMS Managing Stored Messages in the G24 Memory AT+CPMS="me" //Select NVM as preferred memory storage using the +CPMS command +CPMS: 11,61,11,61,2,20 OK AT+CMGF=1 // move to TEXT mode OK AT+CMGL="ALL" //List all messages in memory storage +CMGL: 225,"STO UNSENT","054565132" <Message body> +CMGL: 223,"STO UNSENT","4565029" //Example of G24 response <Message body> +CMGL: 222,"STO SENT","054565029" <Message body> +CMGL: 221,"STO SENT","054565132" <Message body> +CMGL: 220,"STO UNSENT","" <Message body> OK</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-585.html">PAGE 585</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands Setting the Notification Indication for Incoming Messages (Using AT+CNMI) AT+CNMI=,1 //To receive indications of new incoming MT messages, the second parameter of +CNMI should be set to 1 OK +CMTI: "SM",4 //When a new MT message is received, the unsolicited response +CMTI will be displayed, denoting the message index AT+CMGR=4 //Use the new message index to read it +CMGR: "REC UNREAD","+97254565132",,"05/02/13,07:15:36+08" <message body> OK AT+CMGD=4 //Delete the message after</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-586.html">PAGE 586</a></h6> <p>SMS Writing, Saving and Sending Messages (Using AT+CMGW and AT+CMSS) Writing messages into the database, with or without destination address.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-587.html">PAGE 587</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands Sending Messages (Using AT+CMGS) Sends an SM from the G24 to the network in TEXT mode, the header parameters will be set according to CSMP settings. In text mode (+CMGF=1): AT+CMGS="054565028" //Writing a message to be sent to specified destination address >This is the message body <CTRL+Z> //<CTRL+Z> ends the prompt text mode and returns to regular AT command mode +CMGS: 238 //Message successfully sent.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-588.html">PAGE 588</a></h6> <p>Call Control Call Control The following figure is a detailed view of the states the G24 goes through for Voice and CSD Data, as shown in Figure 4-2. Note that between the time the OK is received and the actual connection occurs, call state alerts are received. Idle D ial R eleased Alert C onnected H old Figure 4-10: Call States Dialing Using ATD atd+44 34 56 78; OK OK atd17085763400; OK OK ath NO CARRIER OK AT+CHLD=0 NO CARRIER OK atd+44 34 56 78 ...</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-589.html">PAGE 589</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands atd035659260,345,22; OK OK 345 ... 22 ath NO CARRIER OK atd0356592,60 //VOICE call with tones sent after connecting //Sent as DTMF tones //Pause //Sent as DTMF tones //Voice call is hung up //DATA/FAX call with comma //Comma is ignored; 035659260 is dialed OK Direct Dialing from Phone Book This example uses a phone book with these pre-saved items.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-590.html">PAGE 590</a></h6> <p>Call Control Dialing the Last Number Example atd035658278; OK OK ath NO CARRIER OK atdl ATDL: "035658278" OK atdl; ATDL: "035658278" OK OK atdl ATDL: "035658278" OK //Last called number is "035658278" //DATA call //VOICE call //Last called number is "035658278,123,78;" //DATA call Voice Call Manipulations Call Waiting AT+CCWA=1 //Enabling the call waiting on G24 OK atd9311234567; //Originate a voice call OK OK //Voice call connected (...conversation...</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-591.html">PAGE 591</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands Conference Call atd051632601; //Dialing the first member of the conference OK OK AT+CHLD=2 //Call hold, switch command OK //Active call switched to hold atd035659260; //Calling the second member of the conference OK OK (Dual call state: one call on hold; 2nd is active.) AT+CHLD=3 //Call link command OK //Held call is linked to active call (Active conference of two calls) AT+CLCC //Verifying call state through CLCC //(Verifying call state is optional.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-592.html">PAGE 592</a></h6> <p>Data Call Data Call Switching Modes (Data Mode/Command Mode) atd054565190 //Calling the remote modem OK aaaaaaaaaaaaa //Receiving binary data from remote side (G24 is in Data mode) //Sending escape sequence +++ to G24 (the remote side does not treat +++ as escape) OK //G24 is in Command mode ati3 //Issuing an AT command Motorola Mobile Phone OK ato //Switching back to Binary mode OK fffffff //Receiving binary data from remote side fghhgatfhgfhfhghhfhfhfhgfhffhgfgfhgfhgfhhh //Sending escape sequence +++ to</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-593.html">PAGE 593</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands GPRS When using the GPRS, it is recommended to implement a "keep alive" mechanism. The G24 memory resources should not be used as a buffer for the user, the user maintains its own memory and flow control in its own application. The G24 has finite limited resources such as network related, SIM card and phone memory. In general the user should use a single resource at a time.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-594.html">PAGE 594</a></h6> <p>GPRS Using the ATD* Command Set Request GPRS service 'D': ATD*99***(CID)# The CID (Context ID) includes the APN (defined by the AT+CGDCONT command) to which you want to be connected. This depends on the ability of the SIM card to be attached to the different networks. The format ATD*99# may also be used. In this case, the G24 will first try to activate a non-empty (predefined) CID. If the attempt fails, the G24 will try the next CID, and so on.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-595.html">PAGE 595</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands Changing the Character Set Example When an SMS messages with the following text: "Motorola G24 OEM Module", is saved inside the G24 at entry 128, you can read it using several character sets.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-596.html">PAGE 596</a></h6> <p>Sleep Mode Sleep Mode Note: The notation of TXD and RXD are from the perspective of the terminal unless otherwise specified. The terminal should activate Sleep mode by sending ATS24=n (n - number of seconds). To disable Sleep mode, send ATS24=0.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-597.html">PAGE 597</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands STK Display Text/Display Idle Mode Text The SIM card requests to send text to the G24 and the G24 displays it on the terminal. Figure 4-12: Display Text Get Inkey The SIM card requests to display text on the terminal, and waits for a response from the terminal (user). The response is a single character. Figure 4-13: Get Inkey Note: All responses to unsolicited events are expected within one minute.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-598.html">PAGE 598</a></h6> <p>STK Get Input The SIM card requests to display text on the terminal, and waits for a response from the terminal (user). The response is a string. Figure 4-14: Get Input Note: All responses to unsolicited events are expected within one minute. Play Tone The SIM card requests a tone to be played via the SIM. The G24 sends information about the play tone to the terminal.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-599.html">PAGE 599</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands Set Up Menu The terminal requests the STK menu. As a result, the SIM sends the menu items to the terminal. The user then selects an item from the menu. Figure 4-16: Set Up Menu Select Item The user selects an item. As a result, the SIM sends a response to the terminal. Figure 4-17: Select Item Send SMS The SIM requests to send SMS, and the SMS data is displayed on the terminal.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-600.html">PAGE 600</a></h6> <p>STK Set Up Call The SIM initiates a call, and its data is displayed on the terminal. Figure 4-19: Set Up Call Call Control 1. First, the user makes a call. 2. The call number is sent to the SIM, which decides whether to change the number or not. If the call has been changed, the new number is displayed on the terminal.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-601.html">PAGE 601</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands +MTKM: 2,2,"IN THE COUNTRY",0 AT+MTKM=1,1 OK //Select Item 1. +MTKP: 3,1,0,3,8,0,Enter Country name://User is requested to enter country name AT+MTKP=3,1,"England" //User enters the country OK + MTKP: 1,0,"Weather in England is 5ºC"//Text is sent from the SIM Send DTMF The SIM card requests to send a DTMF string. The G24 sends the DTMF during an active voice call, and notifies the terminal using an +MTKP of this sending action.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-602.html">PAGE 602</a></h6> <p>STK Setup Event List The terminal updates the G24 on any of the events. The G24 passes events from the terminal to the SIM card according to the event list. The event list is requested by the SIM using the "setup event list" command.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-603.html">PAGE 603</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands TCP/IP TCP Data Transfer Example AT+MIPCALL=1,"orange","test","test" OK +MIPCALL: 172.17.242.86 AT+MIPOPEN=1,1222,"123.245.213.012",1234,0 //Opening socket 1 using TCP protocol, from port 1222, targeting 123.245.213.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-604.html">PAGE 604</a></h6> <p>TCP/IP // send a data from terminal to G24 via RS232 communication port: GPRS is the new packet-oriented data se rvice for GSM.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-605.html">PAGE 605</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands +MIPOPEN: 1,1 AT+MIPOPEN=2,1111,"172.17.238.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-606.html">PAGE 606</a></h6> <p>TCP/IP +MIPSEND=1,A344343ABC343438980BC...AB4//Terminal disregards the Xoff request of G24 and keeps sending //(Note: The terminal does not stop.) ERROR 3 +MIPXON: 1 //G24 pushed the data into the protocol stack and is able to handle more sends from the terminal Error in Reopening a Valid Socket AT+MIPCALL=1,"orange","test","test" OK +MIPCALL:123.145.167.230 +MIPOPEN=1,1222,"123.245.213.012",1234,0 //Opening socket 1 using TCP protocol, from port 1222, targeting 123.245.213.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-607.html">PAGE 607</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands Audio Scenarios for Setting Up Handset Mode or Handsfree Mode Handset Mode AT+MAPATH=1,1 AT+MAPATH=2,1,3 AT+MAPATH=2,3,12 AT+MAFEAT=6,0 AT+MAFEAT=1,1 //Set the input path through the microphone //Set voice and keypad through the earpiece speaker //Set alerts and rings to go through the transducer //Disable echo cancellation and noise suppression //Enable sidetone Handsfree Mode AT+MAPATH=1,1 AT+MAPATH=2,1,15 AT+MAFEAT=1,0 AT+MAFEAT=6,1 //Set the input path through the micro</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-608.html">PAGE 608</a></h6> <p>Firmware Update Over the Air (FOTA) Firmware Update Over the Air (FOTA) FOTA Command for Non-Automatic Mode (Non-Transparent Mode) // First, set the Web-Session default entry AT+MFOTAWSCFG=5,8080,"wap.orange.co.il","Orange","mobile54","192.118.11.55" OK AT+MFOTAWSCFG? // Read the Web-Session default entry parameters +MFOTAWSCFG: 5 , 8080,"wap.orange.co.il","Orange","192.118.11.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-609.html">PAGE 609</a></h6> <p>Chapter 4: Using the Commands +MFOTAREQ: 3 AT+MFOTARSP=0 OK // Install package request // Confirm the install process +MFOTAIND: 40, 19 // Update has started indication // During the Update process, the phone will be in flash-mode. The update process is supposed to take a few minutes. FOTA Command for Automatic Mode (Transparent Mode) In automatic/transparent mode, FOTA process include SW Upgrade without any user interaction. In this case any +FOTREQ operational reports will not be sent toward DTE.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-610.html">PAGE 610</a></h6> <p>Firmware Update Over the Air (FOTA) 4-36 AT Commands Reference Manual August 5, 2008</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-611.html">PAGE 611</a></h6> <p>Chapter 5: Tools Tools Overview This chapter describes the PC Driver and PC Loader tools provided by the application. PC Driver enables the G24 to be used as a PC external modem for fax communication and for performing GPRS packet data connections. PC Loader is a PC-based software application that enables users to reprogram G24 modules through an RS232 interface.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-612.html">PAGE 612</a></h6> <p>PC Driver Using WinFAX To configure the modem in WinFAX, follow the procedure below: 1. Run WinFAX. 2. Select Tools > Program Setup > Modems and Communications Devices > Properties. 3. Set the standard 19200 bps modem to Active. 4. Click Next and select CLASS 1 (Hardware Flow Control) > Next > Finish, Set Default (or other) > OK. 5. In the Modem and Communications Devices Properties window, click Properties. 6.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-613.html">PAGE 613</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables This appendix contains the following sections: • AT Commands Alphabetical Summary, below • • • • • • AT Commands Behaviour With UART2 Fully Functional, Page -23 Character Set Table CS1: (GSM -> UCS-2), Page -33 Character Set Table CS2: (ASCII <-> UTF-8), Page -37 Character Set Table CS3: (UCS-2 <-> UTF-8), Page -37 Character Set Table CS6: (UCS-2 Full Table), Page -37 Character Set Table CS7: (ASCII table), Page -37 Note: Character Set Table CS6: (UCS-2) is provided on CD due</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-614.html">PAGE 614</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Alphabetical Summary Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command A-2 Description Page &G This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 &J This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 &K This command configures the RTS/CTS flow control. Page 3-204 &L This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-615.html">PAGE 615</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page \G This command sets the use of the software control. Page 3-288 \J This command adjusts the terminal auto rate. Page 3-288 \K This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 \N This command links the type. Page 3-288 \S This command displays the status of selected commands and S-registers.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-616.html">PAGE 616</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Alphabetical Summary Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command A-4 Description Page +CCFC This command enables control of the call-forwarding supplementary service. Page 3-29 +CCLK This command reads/sets the G24's current date and time settings. Page 3-96 +CCWA This command controls the Call Waiting supplementary service, including settings and querying of the network by the G24.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-617.html">PAGE 617</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +CGEQREQ This command allows the TE to specify a EDGE Quality of Service Profile that is used when the MT sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network. Page 3-348 +CGMI This command requests manufacturer identification. Page 3-1 +CGMM This command requests the model identification. Page 3-2 +CGMR This command requests the revision identification.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-618.html">PAGE 618</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Alphabetical Summary Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command A-6 Description Page +CIMI This command requests the International Mobile Subscriber Identity number. Page 3-6 +CIND This command is used to query the status of various ME indicators. Page 3-324 +CKEV This command causes the G24 to send an unsolicited message when a key is pressed on the G24 keypad, and local key press echo is enabled.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-619.html">PAGE 619</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +CMER This command enables an external accessory to receive key press information from the G24’s internal keypad. Page 3-322 +CMGD This command deletes messages from the G24 memory. Page 3-132 +CMGF This command handles the selection of message formats. Page 3-101 +CMGL This command displays a list of SMS messages stored in the G24 memory.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-620.html">PAGE 620</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Alphabetical Summary Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command A-8 Description Page +COLP This command refers to the GSM supplementary service COLP, Connected Line Identification Presentation, which enables a calling subscriber to get the connected line identity (COL) of the called party after setting up a mobile originated call.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-621.html">PAGE 621</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +CPUC This command sets the parameters of the Advice of Charge-related price per unit and currency table found in the SIM file, EFPUCT. Page 3-60 +CPWD This command sets a new password for the facility lock. Page 3-264 +CR This command controls whether or not the extended format of an outgoing call is displayed or not.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-622.html">PAGE 622</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Alphabetical Summary Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command A-10 Description Page +CSMS This command handles the selection of the SMS service type. Page 3-98 +CSNS This command handles the selection of the bearer or teleservice to be used when a mobile terminated single numbering scheme call is established. Page 3-36 +CSSN This command handles the enabling and disabling of supplementary service-related, network-initiated, notifications.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-623.html">PAGE 623</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +FIT This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 +FMI This command requests manufacturer identification. Page 3-1 +FMM This command requests the model identification. Page 3-2 +FMR This command requests the revision identification.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-624.html">PAGE 624</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Alphabetical Summary Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command A-12 Description Page +FTPLIST This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to send a list. Page 3-443 +FTPMKD This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to create a new directory. Page 3-437 +FTPNOOP This command causes the G24 to request the remote FTP server to do nothing. Page 3-447 +FTPOPEN This command causes G24 to open a FTP connection with a remote FTP server.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-625.html">PAGE 625</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +GMI This command requests manufacturer identification. Page 3-1 +GMM This command requests the model identification. Page 3-2 +GMR This command requests the revision identification. Page 3-3 +GSN This command requests the product serial number identification.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-626.html">PAGE 626</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Alphabetical Summary Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command A-14 Description Page +MCEG This command disables / enables EDGE support in G24 modules with EDGE support capability. Page 3-364 +MCELL This command displays information about the Cellular Network. Page 3-182 +MCSAT This command enables/disables/exercises SMS alert tone for an arriving SMS. Page 3-137 +MCSN This command sets EFmsisdn in the SIM.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-627.html">PAGE 627</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +MDSI This command enables unsolicited reporting of indications of SIM deactivation and invalidation. Page 3-78 +MEDT This command enables/disables the G24 tones. Page 3-139 +MEGA This command updates the Email Gateway Address. Page 3-167 +MEMAS This command is used for Email account settings. Page 3-151 +MEMD This command is used to delete an Email message.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-628.html">PAGE 628</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Alphabetical Summary Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command A-16 Description Page +MFOTARSP This command is used to send response to +MFOTAREQ reports. Page 3-275 +MFOTAWSCFG This command sets the Web-Session default entry. Page 3-271 +MFS This command is used to determine how long the G24 waits before attempting to re-register after a registration attempt has failed and the G24 is not registered.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-629.html">PAGE 629</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +MIPCLOSE This command causes the G24 module to free the socket accumulating buffer and disconnect the G24 from a remote side. Page 3-401 +MIPCONF This command allows to configure TCP stack parameters, such as retransmissions number, upper and bottom limits of retransmission timeout, close delay.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-630.html">PAGE 630</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Alphabetical Summary Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command A-18 Description Page +MIPSEND This command causes the G24 to transmit the data that the terminal provides, using an existing protocol stack. Page 3-404 +MIPSETS This command causes the G24 to set a watermark in the accumulating buffer. When the watermark is reached, data is pushed from the accumulating buffer into the protocol stack.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-631.html">PAGE 631</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +MNTFY This command enables/disables unsolicited report of NOTIFY indication arrived from the NW. Page 3-53 +MPCMC This command defines whether the PCM clock is generated continuously or not, when module is in digital audio mode. Page 3-232 +MPDPM This command returns the collective percentage of memory used by the phonebook and datebook in their shared dynamic memory storage.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-632.html">PAGE 632</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Alphabetical Summary Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command A-20 Description Page +MTDTR This command checks and outputs the physical current status of the DTR pin of the RS232. Page 3-203 +MTKC This unsolicited event notifies the terminal when supplementary services, SMS Control or Call Control are modified. Page 3-393 +MTKE This command enables/disables the SIM ToolKit functionalities. Page 3-375 +MTKM This is both a command and an unsolicited event.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-633.html">PAGE 633</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command August 5, 2008 Description Page +TSMSRET This command controls the SMS sending retry. Page 3-143 +TWUR This command is used to query the wakeup reason(s). Page 3-215 +TWUS This command is used to set the wakeup reason(s). Page 3-213 +VTD This command handles the selection of tone duration. Page 3-256 +VTS This command transmits DTMF tones when a voice call is active.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-634.html">PAGE 634</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Alphabetical Summary Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command A-22 Description Page I This command requests various G24 information items. Page 3-6 L This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 M This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 N This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-635.html">PAGE 635</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-1: AT Commands (Alphabetical) (Cont.) AT Command Description Page T This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and has no effect. Page 3-451 V This command determines the response format of the data adapter and the contents of the header and trailer transmitted with the result codes and information responses. Page 3-281 X This command defines the data adaptor response set, and the CONNECT result code format.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-636.html">PAGE 636</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Behaviour When UART 2 Has Full Functionality Table A-2: AT Commands Behaviour With UART2 Fully Functional (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-637.html">PAGE 637</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-2: AT Commands Behaviour With UART2 Fully Functional (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-638.html">PAGE 638</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Behaviour When UART 2 Has Full Functionality Table A-2: AT Commands Behaviour With UART2 Fully Functional (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-639.html">PAGE 639</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-2: AT Commands Behaviour With UART2 Fully Functional (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-640.html">PAGE 640</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Behaviour When UART 2 Has Full Functionality Table A-2: AT Commands Behaviour With UART2 Fully Functional (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-641.html">PAGE 641</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-2: AT Commands Behaviour With UART2 Fully Functional (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-642.html">PAGE 642</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Behaviour When UART 2 Has Full Functionality Table A-2: AT Commands Behaviour With UART2 Fully Functional (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-643.html">PAGE 643</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Table A-2: AT Commands Behaviour With UART2 Fully Functional (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-644.html">PAGE 644</a></h6> <p>AT Commands Behaviour When UART 2 Has Full Functionality Table A-2: AT Commands Behaviour With UART2 Fully Functional (Cont.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-645.html">PAGE 645</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Character Set Table CS1: (GSM -> UCS-2) The following table shows the conversion between the GSM and UCS-2 character sets. Symbol August 5, 2008 GSM (GSM 03.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-646.html">PAGE 646</a></h6> <p>Character Set Table CS1: (GSM -> UCS-2) Symbol A-34 GSM (GSM 03.38) 0x1D 0x00E6 ß 0x1E 0x03B2 É 0x1F 0x00C9 SP 0x20 0x0020 ! 0x21 0x0021 " 0x22 0x0022 # 0x23 0x0023 ¤ 0x24 0x00A4 % 0x25 0x0025 & 0x26 0x0026 ' 0x27 0x0027 ( 0x28 0x0028 ) 0x29 0x0029 * 0x2A 0x002A + 0x2B 0x002B , 0x2C 0x002C - 0x2D 0x002D .</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-647.html">PAGE 647</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Symbol August 5, 2008 GSM (GSM 03.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-648.html">PAGE 648</a></h6> <p>Character Set Table CS1: (GSM -> UCS-2) Symbol A-36 GSM (GSM 03.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-649.html">PAGE 649</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Character Set Table CS2: (ASCII <-> UTF-8) The following table shows the conversion between the ASCII and UTF-8 character sets. ASCII-7bit Byte Encoding 00 - 7F UTF-8 Bit Encoding 0xxxxxxx Character Set Table CS3: (UCS-2 <-> UTF-8) The following table shows the conversion between the UCS-2 and UTF-8 character sets.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-650.html">PAGE 650</a></h6> <p>Character Set Table CS7: (ASCII table) Decimal A-38 Octal Hex Binary Value Description 005 005 005 00000101 ENQ (Enquiry) 006 006 006 00000110 ACK (Acknowledgm ent) 007 007 007 00000111 BEL (Bell) 008 010 008 00001000 BS (Backspace) 009 011 009 00001001 HT (Horizontal Tab) 010 012 00A 00001010 LF (Line Feed) 011 013 00B 00001011 VT (Vertical Tab) 012 014 00C 00001100 FF (Form Feed) 013 015 00D 00001101 CR (Carriage Return) 014 016 00E 00001110</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-651.html">PAGE 651</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Decimal August 5, 2008 Octal Hex Binary Value Description 030 036 01E 00011110 RS (Request to Send)(Record Separator) 031 037 01F 00011111 US (Unit Separator) 032 040 020 00100000 SP (Space) 033 041 021 00100001 ! (exclamation mark) 034 042 022 00100010 " (double quote) 035 043 023 00100011 # (number sign) 036 044 024 00100100 $ (dollar sign) 037 045 025 00100101 % (percent) 038 046 026 00100110 & (ampersand) 039 047</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-652.html">PAGE 652</a></h6> <p>Character Set Table CS7: (ASCII table) Decimal A-40 Octal Hex Binary Value Description 061 075 03D 00111101 = (equal sign) 062 076 03E 00111110 > (greater than) 063 077 03F 00111111 ? (question mark) 064 100 040 01000000 @ (AT symbol) 065 101 041 01000001 A 066 102 042 01000010 B 067 103 043 01000011 C 068 104 044 01000100 D 069 105 045 01000101 E 070 106 046 01000110 F 071 107 047 01000111 G 072 110 048 01001000 H 073 111 049 010010</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-653.html">PAGE 653</a></h6> <p>Appendix A: Reference Tables Decimal August 5, 2008 Octal Hex Binary Value Description 093 135 05D 01011101 ] (right/closing bracket) 094 136 05E 01011110 ^ (caret/circumfl ex) 095 137 05F 01011111 _ (underscore) 096 140 060 01100000 ` 097 141 061 01100001 a 098 142 062 01100010 b 099 143 063 01100011 c 100 144 064 01100100 d 101 145 065 01100101 e 102 146 066 01100110 f 103 147 067 01100111 g 104 150 068 01101000 h 105 151 069 011010</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-654.html">PAGE 654</a></h6> <p>Character Set Table CS7: (ASCII table) Decimal A-42 Octal Hex Binary Value Description 125 175 07D 01111101 } (right/closing brace) 126 176 07E 01111110 ~ (tilde) 127 177 07F 01111111 DEL (delete) AT Commands Reference Manual August 5, 2008</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-655.html">PAGE 655</a></h6> <p>Appendix B: MUX This appendix contains the following sections: • PREMUX State, below • Mux-Init State, below • MUX State, Page -B-2 • Software Procedures Related to RS232 HW Lines, Page -B-2 PREMUX State Entry to State • When the G24 powers up. Exit from state: • When the DTE sends the +CMUX command to the G24 to start the MUX stack and the G24 acknowledges with an OK response. (The MUX-Init state then begins.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-656.html">PAGE 656</a></h6> <p>MUX State MUX State Entry to state: • When the G24 receives the SABM0 frame. Exit from state: • When the DTE requests the G24 to return to the PREMUX State. Software Procedures Related to RS232 HW Lines RI Hardware Line • PREMUX state: There is no change to the current RI line behavior. • MUX-Init state: The RI line becomes inactive. • MUX state: There is no change to the current RI line behavior. DCD Hardware Line In MUX and MUX-Init states, the DCD is always inactive.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-657.html">PAGE 657</a></h6> <p>Appendix B: MUX MUX UART Port Speed Auto baud rate detection is disabled in the MUX. To set the UART baud rate, the G24 uses the <port speed> parameter in +CMUX command. If the parameter is absent, the MUX uses the same baud rate that was in PREMUX state. Controlling the UART Port Speed Within MUX State AT commands such as +CBAUD and +IPR change the virtual baud rate of an IDLC. The AT+CBAUD? or AT+IPR? commands display the virtual baud rate of the specific IDLC.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-658.html">PAGE 658</a></h6> <p>Software Procedures Related to RS232 HW Lines Advanced Mode MUX Software Flow Control Per Channel The MUX software flow control per channel is not implemented in G24 internal MUX. MUX Modes The following table describes the differences between each mode in a non-ERM environment.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-659.html">PAGE 659</a></h6> <p>Appendix B: MUX Advance Mode Frame Packing The transmitter (referring to the sender of a frame) examines the frame between the opening and closing flag sequences (including the address, control and FCS fields) and, following completion of the FCS calculation, does the following: • When encountering protected characters, complements the 6th bit of the octet (XOR with 0x20). • Inserts a control escape octet immediately preceding the octet resulting from the above, prior to transmission.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-660.html">PAGE 660</a></h6> <p>Software Procedures Related to RS232 HW Lines Table B-3: MUX State Procedures (Cont.) Procedure Description DISC0 Reception – Close MUX Upon receiving a DISC0 frame, the G24 checks for any open IDLCs. If the only open channel is the control channel, the G24 sends a UA frame to the DTE, returns to PREMUX state (command mode) and sends an OK to the DTE. If there are any open information channels, or if the G24 cannot return to PREMUX state, it sends a DM frame to the DTE.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-661.html">PAGE 661</a></h6> <p>Appendix B: MUX A change in the status of the first group of signals can be made only by the G24. A change in the status of the second group of signals can be made by a specific channel in DTE (IDLC). When a change is made by the G24 to the status of any of the first group of signals in an IDLC, it sends an MSC frame to the DTE with the new status, as follows: • CTS - Not supported, always on.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-662.html">PAGE 662</a></h6> <p>Software Procedures Related to RS232 HW Lines The following figure illustrates a MUX user packet, which has a maximum of four virtual channels. User HW UART User Code MUX Packet Interactive Buffer Service +CMUX ISR Point 4: USER_tx_service (bytes_in_queue) Point 5: TS0710_close_all_MUX_channels() TS0710_open_all_MUX_channels() Point 1: TS0710_rx_handler_api (BYTE* rx_string, WORD len_rx_string MUX Packet Trigger ts_0710_send_CLD_cmd (DLC_CMD_OR_RESP type) open Mgr.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-663.html">PAGE 663</a></h6> <p>Appendix B: MUX Open Service The API Open Service MIP and MUI procedures are as follows: • MIP: Use API TS0710_open_all_MUX_channels(). • MUI: 1. Send establish for control channel (27.010 SABM command frame for Channel 0). 2. Wait for ACK (27.010 UA command frame). 3. Send up to four establish command frames for the data channels (27.010 SABM command frame for Channel 1). 4. Wait for ACK frames (27.010 UA command frame).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-664.html">PAGE 664</a></h6> <p>Software Procedures Related to RS232 HW Lines MUX Service Test Includes MSC, FC, and so on (all to control channel). For the following service functions, refer to Figure B-1 • MIP: 1. Void ts_0710_send_CLD_cmd (DLC_CMD_OR_RESP type). 2. Void ts_0710_send_test_req (BYTE* test_DATA, WORD test_DATA_length). 3. Void ts_0710_send_Channel_DTR_status (BYTE DTR_Signal, BYTE dlc). 4. Void ts_0710_send_test_req (BYTE* test_DATA, WORD test_DATA_length). MUX Open Service To open the MUX service: 1.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-665.html">PAGE 665</a></h6> <p>Acronyms and Abbreviations Abbreviation Full Name A A ACCH AT Command Channel - Used for AT-commands, TCP/IP, Internal-GPRS session, Voice-Call, and SMS applications A AOC Advice of Charge A APN Access Point Name A ASCII A standard seven-bit code character set A ATA AT command for call answer A ATD AT command for call originating A ATH AT command for Hanging-up a call A ATO AT command to return to Data mode after temporarily exiting by ESC B BM Broadcast Message C CA A certificate autho</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-666.html">PAGE 666</a></h6> <p>Abbreviation Full Name D D DA Destination Address D DCD Data Carrier Detect D DCE Data Communication Equipment (G24) D DCSs Data Coding Schemas D DLC Data Link Connection D DLC0 The multiplexer control channel. D DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier D DSP Digital Signal Processor D DSR Data Set Ready D DSR MGOM is ON and ready to communicate with the DTE device. D DT Discharge Time D DTE Data Terminal Equipment (such as terminals, PCs and so on).</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-667.html">PAGE 667</a></h6> <p>Acronyms and Abbreviations Abbreviation Full Name H H HCO August 5, 2008 Hearing Carry Over allows Speech Disabled callers who can hear well on the telephone to listen directly to the person they are talking with. The Speech Disabled Relay user types his or her part of the conversation on a TTY. A Communication Assistant (CA) then speaks the typed conversation, word for word, to the standard telephone user.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-668.html">PAGE 668</a></h6> <p>Abbreviation Full Name I I IC Integrated Circuit I ID Identification I IDLC Information DLC - refers to all the data channels except the control channel. I IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identification. I ISR Interrupt Service Routine I ITU International Telecommunication Union L L LCA Low Cost Architecture M MCC/MNC Mobile Country Code / Mobile Network Code M ME Mobile Equipment M MGOM Motorola G24 GSM OEM Modem, also called Base Band processor.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-669.html">PAGE 669</a></h6> <p>Acronyms and Abbreviations Abbreviation Full Name Q, R Q QoS Quality of Service Q RA Recipient Address Q RI Ring Indicator Q RTS Request To Send Q RTS Q RXD RS232 pin used for HW flow control. The DTE uses this pin to stop data transmission from the MGOM (on the RXD pin). DTE received data from MGOM.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-670.html">PAGE 670</a></h6> <p>Abbreviation Full Name T T TBD To Be Defined T TDMA Time Division Multiple Access T TE Terminal Equipment T TLS T TODA Transport Layer Security protocol for establishing a secure connection between a client and a server. TLS is based on SSL 3.0 protocol.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-671.html">PAGE 671</a></h6> <p>Index Numerics 8859 Character Set Management, 1-23 A Abbreviations General System, 2-2 Aborting Commands, 2-8 Access Control Commands, 3-258 Acknowledgement New Message, 3-108 Address Email Gateway, 3-167 Service Center, 3-101 Argument Types in AT Commands, 2-7 ASCII Character Set Management, 1-22 AT Command Reference +CALM, Alert Sound Mode, 3-251 +CFUN, Shut Down Phone Functionality, 3-210 +CLVL, Loudspeaker Volume, 3-239 +CPOL, Preferred Operators, 3-177 +CRSL, Call Ringer Level, 3-238 +CSCB, Cell Broa</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-672.html">PAGE 672</a></h6> <p>Index A-A +CMGW, Write Message to Memory, 3-127 +CMSS, Send Message From Storage, 3-125 +CMTI, Unsolicited Result Code, 3-110 +CMUT, Mute/Unmute Currently Active Microphone Path, 3-240 +CMUX, MUX Startup Command, 3-467 +CNMA, New Message Acknowledgement, 3-108 +CNMI, New Message Indications to Terminal, 3-107 +CNUM, Request MSISDN(s), 3-7 +COLP, Connected Line Identification Presentation, 3-69 +COPS, Operator Selection, 3-174 +CPAS, Phone Activity Status, 3-46 +CPBF, Find Phone Book Entries, 3-75 +CPBR, R</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-673.html">PAGE 673</a></h6> <p>B-C Index +TPIN, Query Number of Remaining SIM PIN/PUK Entering Attempts, 3-263 +TSMSRET, Control SMS Sending Retry, 3-143 +TWUS, Wakeup Reason Set, 3-213 $, List of All Available AT Commands, 3-8 A, Answer Incoming Call, 3-19 A/, Repeat Last Command, 3-258 Access Control Commands, 3-258 AT, Check AT Communication, 3-258 ATS97, Antenna Diagnostic, 3-212 Audio Tone Commands, 3-238 Call Control, 3-11, 3-13 Capability Reporting, 3-10 CGPADDR, GPRS ADDResses, 3-344 D, Dial, 3-13 D*99, Request GPRS Service "D"</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-674.html">PAGE 674</a></h6> <p>Index D-G GSM, 1-22 UCS2, 1-22 UTF-8, 1-22 Charge Advice, 3-55 Circuit 108 Behavior, 3-207 Circuit 109 Behavior, 3-205 Clock, 3-71 Command Argument Types Numeric Constants, 2-7 String Constants, 2-7 Command ArgumentTypes, 2-7 Command Mode Types, 2-7 Command ModeTypes Parameter Read Command Syntax, 2-7 Parameter Set Command Syntax, 2-7 Parameter Test Command Syntax, 2-7 Command Token Types, 2-6 Basic Syntax Command Format, 2-6 Extended Syntax Command Format, 2-6 S-parameters, 2-6 Commands Show Status, 3-28</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-675.html">PAGE 675</a></h6> <p>H-M Index Overview, 1-1 Request Service "D", 3-340 Technical Description (Class B Operation), 1-1 GPRS Commands, 3-331 GPRS Operation, 1-1 GSM Character Set Management, 1-22 H Hanging Up, 3-12 Hang-up Call, 3-17 Hardware Information, 3-199 HDLC Frame Receive Data, 3-459 I Identification Request Infomation, 3-6 IGNORED (Compatible Only) Commands, 3-451 Ignored Commands, 3-451 IMSI Request, 3-6 Incoming Call Answer, 3-19 Incoming Call Indicator, 3-19 Indications New Message, 3-107 Indicator Incoming Call,</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-676.html">PAGE 676</a></h6> <p>Index N-S Receiving Data Service, B-9 Sending Data Service, B-9 Service Test, B-10 Software Procedures Related to RS232 Pins, B-2 Source Code APIs, 3-469, B-8 States Overview, 3-464 Test UIH Control Frames, B-6 Transparency Mechanism, B-4 UART Flow Control, 3-466 UART Hardware Flow Control, 3-466 UART Port Speed, B-3 UART Software Flow Control, 3-466 UIH Frames, B-6 Virtual Channel V.</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-677.html">PAGE 677</a></h6> <p>T-W Index Silence Receive, 3-454 Transmit, 3-454 SIM Card Unblocking, 3-259 Unlocking, 3-259 Sleep Mode HW Signals, 3-291 Set Delay, 3-293 Sleep Mode AT Commands, 3-291 Sleep Mode Commands, 3-290 SM, 3-310 SMS, 1-18, 4-10 Features and Benefits, 1-18 Overview, 1-18 Technical Description, 1-19 SMS Commands, 3-98 Socket Close, 3-401 Open, 3-396 S-parameters in Command Token Types, 2-6 S-Registers Show Status, 3-288 S-Regsiter Return Last Updated, 3-289 Status Commands and S-Registers in Effect, 3-288 Network</p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-678.html">PAGE 678</a></h6> <p></p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-679.html">PAGE 679</a></h6> <p></p> </li> <li> <h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href="/manual/motorola/at-commands-g24-l/3-technical-information-english/page-680.html">PAGE 680</a></h6> <p>MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. ?Copyright 2007 Motorola, Inc. Java? Technology and/or J2ME? : Java and all other Java–based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. UNIX? : UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.</p> </li> </ul> </nav> </div> </section> </section> </main> <footer class="page-footer"> <div class="container flex-column py-3 py-sm-4"> <div class="row mb-1 mb-sm-2 mb-md-5"> <a href="/" class="brand offset-sm-0 col-sm-4 col-md-3 col-lg-2 offset-2 col-8 text-center text-md-start"><img class="logo-small" src="/assets/img/brand-large.png" alt="Manualshelf"/></a> </div> <div class="row"> <dl class="text-center text-sm-start col-sm-3"> <dt class="fw-bold">Who We Are</dt> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="/about">About Us</a></dd> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="/company">Company</a></dd> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="/careers">Careers</a></dd> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="/terms">Terms & Privacy</a></dd> </dl> <dl class="text-center text-sm-start col-sm-3"> <dt class="fw-bold">Resources</dt> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="/brands">List of Manufacturers</a></dd> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="/">Support</a></dd> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="/press">For the Press</a></dd> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="/press#assets">Media assets</a></dd> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="/faq">FAQ</a></dd> </dl> <dl class="text-center text-sm-start col-sm-3"> <dt class="fw-bold">Get in touch</dt> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="#">Blog</a></dd> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="#">Email</a></dd> <dd><a class="text-decoration-none" href="/dmca">DMCA</a></dd> </dl> </div> <div class="row"> <div class="text-center text-sm-start col-sm-4 pe-sm-0"> <a href="https://www.facebook.com/pages/ManualShelf/1488826334681423" class="fs-5 text-center d-inline-block social rounded-2 align-middle text-decoration-none me-2"><i class="fab fa-facebook-f"></i></a> <a href="https://www.twitter.com/ManualShelf" class="fs-5 text-center d-inline-block social rounded-2 align-middle text-decoration-none me-2"><i class="fab fa-twitter"></i></a> <a href="https://plus.google.com/+ManualShelf" class="fs-5 text-center d-inline-block social rounded-2 align-middle text-decoration-none me-2"><i class="fab fa-google-plus-g"></i></a> <a href="http://www.pinterest.com/ManualShelf" class="fs-5 text-center d-inline-block social rounded-2 align-middle text-decoration-none"><i class="fab fa-pinterest-p"></i></a> </div> <div class="col col-sm-8 d-flex flex-column align-items-center flex-sm-row flex-wrap flex-sm-nowrap justify-content-center justify-content-sm-end"> <div class="copy w-auto d-flex align-items-center justify-content-center justify-content-sm-end mt-2 mt-sm-0 me-2">ManualShelf © 2013-2025</div> <select class="form-select form-select-sm w-auto mt-2 mt-sm-0"> <option value="usa">USA</option> </select> <div> </div> </div>  <div id='pixel'> <script> googletag.cmd.push(function() { googletag.display('pixel'); }); </script> </div> </footer>  <script src="/assets/js/jquery-3.3.1.min.js"></script> <script src="/assets/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js"></script> <script src="/assets/js/jquery.autocomplete.min.js"></script>  <script type="text/javascript"> $.extend({ redirectPost: function(location, args) { var form = ''; $.each(args, function(key, value) { form += '<input type="hidden" name="' + key + '" value="' + value + '">'; }); form = '<form id="s1" action="' + location + '" method="POST">' + form + '</form>'; $(document.body).append(form); $("#s1").submit(); } }); $(document).ready(function(){ $("#query").autocomplete({ minChars: 3, groupBy: 'type', paramName: 'q', dataType: 'json', serviceUrl: '/autocomplete', noCache: true, showNoSuggestionNotice: true, noSuggestionNotice: 'Zarro results found', onSelect: function (suggestion) { $.redirectPost(suggestion.data.url, {highlight: encodeURIComponent(JSON.stringify(suggestion.data.hls))}); } }); var toc = $('.toc-selector'); if (toc.length) { var slideParams = { duration: 800, easing: 'linear' }; toc.click(function() { $(this).toggleClass('open'); var section = $('.toc-content'); var isCollapsed = section.attr('data-collapsed') === 'true'; if (isCollapsed) { section.slideDown(slideParams) section.attr('data-collapsed', 'false') } else { section.slideUp(slideParams); section.attr('data-collapsed', 'true') } }); } }); var lastSmall = $(window).width() < 576; $(window).resize(function() { var newSmall = $(window).width() < 576; if (lastSmall != newSmall) { lastSmall = newSmall; window.location.href = window.location.href; } }); </script> </body> </html>